XC70

Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dc TP !
C97C (Eng||sh), AT C92C, Pr|neo |n Sweoen, Coeborg 2CC9, Cop,r|gh 2CCC2CC9 vo|o Cur Corporu|on
VOLVO V70 & XC70
Owners Manual
WEB EDITION
DEAR VOLVO OWNER
THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your
Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of
you and your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the
world. Your Volvo has also been designed to satisfy all current
safety and environmental requirements.
In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend
that you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions
and maintenance information contained in this owner's manual.
Table of contents
2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
00
00 Introduction
Important information................................. 6
Volvo and the environment......................... 9
01
01 Safety
Seatbelts .................................................. 14
Airbag system (SRS - Airbag)................... 17
Activating/deactivating the airbag*........... 20
Side airbags (SIPS bags) ......................... 22
Inflatable Curtain (IC) ............................... 24
WHIPS ...................................................... 25
When the systems deploy ........................ 27
Safety mode.............................................. 28
Child safety............................................... 29
02
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade.................. 40
Privacy locking*......................................... 45
Battery replacement, remote control key/
PCC*......................................................... 46
Keyless drive*............................................ 48
Locking/unlocking..................................... 50
Child safety locks...................................... 55
Alarm*....................................................... 56
Table of contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3
03
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls.......................... 62
Key positions............................................ 71
Seats......................................................... 73
Steering wheel.......................................... 77
Lighting..................................................... 78
Wipers and washing.................................. 87
Windows, rearview and door mirrors........ 90
Compass*................................................. 94
Power sunroof*......................................... 95
Starting the engine.................................... 97
Starting the engine Flexifuel................... 99
Starting the engine external battery..... 101
Gearboxes............................................... 102
All-wheel drive AWD*........................... 107
Foot brake............................................... 108
Hill Descent Control (HDC)..................... 110
Parking brake.......................................... 112
HomeLink
*............................................ 115
04
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages............................. 120
Climate control........................................ 126
Fuel-driven engine block heater and pas-
senger compartment heater*.................. 133
Fuel-driven additional heater*................. 136
Audio system.......................................... 137
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system -
Dual Screen* .......................................... 150
Trip computer......................................... 155
DSTC Stability and traction control sys-
tem.......................................................... 157
Adapting driving characteristics............. 159
Cruise control*........................................ 160
Adaptive cruise control*.......................... 161
Distance Alert.......................................... 167
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*........ 170
Driver Alert System DAC*..................... 175
Driver Alert System - LDW*..................... 178
Park assist syst*...................................... 181
BLIS* Blind Spot Information System. . 184
Comfort inside the passenger compart-
ment........................................................ 188
Bluetooth handsfree*.............................. 191
Built-in phone*........................................ 196
05
05 During your journey
Recommendations during driving........... 202
Refuelling................................................ 204
Fuel......................................................... 205
Loading................................................... 208
Cargo area.............................................. 211
Warning triangle*..................................... 215
Driving with a trailer................................ 216
Towing and recovery.............................. 221
Table of contents
4
06
06 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment............................... 226
Lamps..................................................... 232
Wiper blades and washer fluid................ 239
Battery..................................................... 241
Fuses...................................................... 244
Wheels and tyres.................................... 252
Car care.................................................. 265
07
07 Specifications
Type designations................................... 272
Dimensions and weights......................... 274
Engine specifications.............................. 279
Engine oil................................................ 280
Fluids and lubricants............................... 283
Fuel......................................................... 286
Electrical system..................................... 288
Type approval......................................... 289
08
08 Alphabetical Index
Alphabetical Index.................................. 290
Table of contents
5
Introduction
Important information
6
Reading the Owner's Manual
Introduction
A good way of getting to know your new car is
to read the owner's manual, ideally before your
first journey. This will give you the opportunity
to familiarise yourself with new functions, to
see how best to handle the car in different sit-
uations, and to make the best use of all the
car's features. Please pay attention to the
safety instructions contained in the manual.
The equipment described in the owner's man-
ual is not present in all cars. In addition to
standard equipment, this manual also
describes options (factory fitted equipment)
and certain accessories (retrofitted extra
equipment). If you are uncertain over what is
standard or option/accessory then we recom-
mend that you contact your Volvo dealer.
Volvo cars are adapted for the varying require-
ments of different markets, as well as for
national or local legal requirements and regu-
lations.
The specifications, design features and illus-
trations in this owner's manual are not binding.
We reserve the right to make modifications
without prior notice.
Volvo Car Corporation
Option
All types of option/accessory are marked with
an asterisk .
The range of options/accessories for the dif-
ferent car models varies depending on the mar-
ket. The majority of options are factory fitted
and cannot be retrofitted, accessories are ret-
rofitted.
We recommend that you contact your author-
ised Volvo dealer for more information.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts advise of a risk of personal
injury.
IMPORTANT
Important texts advise of a risk of material
damage.
NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate
the use of features and functions for exam-
ple.
Footnote
There is footnote information in the owner's
manual that is located at the bottom of the
page. This information is an addition to the text
that it refers to via a number. If the footnote
refers to text in a table then letters are used
instead of numbers for referral.
Message texts
There are displays in the car that show text
messages. These text messages are high-
lighted in the owner's manual by means of the
text being slightly larger and printed in grey.
Examples of this are in menu texts and mes-
sage texts on the information display (e.g.
Audio settings).
Decals
The car contains different types of decal which
are designed to convey important information
in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the
car have the following descending degree of
importance for the warning/information.
Introduction
7
Warning for personal injury
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,
white text/image on black message field. Used
to indicate the presence of danger which, if the
warning is ignored, may result in serious per-
sonal injury or fatality.
Risk of property damage
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger which,
if the warning is ignored, may result in damage
to property.
Information
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field.
NOTE
The labels shown in the owner's manual are
not provided as exact reproductions of
those in the car. The purpose is to show
their approximate appearance and location
in the car. The information that applies to
your car in particular is available on the label
in question in your car.
Procedure lists
Procedures where action must be taken in a
certain sequence are numbered in the owner's
manual.
Introduction
8
When there is a series of illustrations for
step-by-step instructions each step is
numbered in the same way as the corres-
ponding illustration.
There are numbered lists with letters adja-
cent to the series of illustrations where the
order of the instructions is not significant.
Arrows appear numbered and unnum-
bered and are used to illustrate a move-
ment.
If there is no series of illustrations for step-by-
step instructions then the different steps are
numbered with normal numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used
in overview images where different com-
ponents are pointed out. The number
recurs in the position list featured in con-
nection with the illustration that describes
the item.
Bulleted lists
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
Example:
Coolant
Engine oil
To be continued
`` This symbol is located furthest down to the
right when a section continues on the following
page.
Recording data
The driving and safety systems in the car use
computers which check and share information
with each other on the car's function. One or
more of these computers may store informa-
tion on the systems they check during normal
driving, during the course of a collision or near-
collision. Stored information may be used by:
Volvo Car Corporation
Service or repair workshops
Police or other authorities
Other parties who claim legal entitlement
for access to the information or someone
who has permission from the owner to
access the information.
Accessories and extra equipment
The incorrect connection and installation of
accessories can negatively affect the car's
electrical system. Certain accessories only
function when their associated software is
installed in the car's computer system. We
therefore recommend that you always contact
an authorised Volvo workshop before installing
accessories which are connected to or affect
the electrical system.
Information on the Internet
At www.volvocars.com there is further infor-
mation concerning your car.
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy
G
0
0
0
0
0
0
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo-
ration's core values which influence all opera-
tions. We also believe that our customers share
our consideration for the environment.
Your Volvo complies with strict international
environmental standards and is also manufac-
tured in one of the cleanest and most resource-
efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corpo-
ration has global ISO certification, which
includes the environmental standard ISO
14001 covering all factories and several of our
other units. We also set requirements for our
partners so that they work systematically with
environmental issues.
Fuel consumption
Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption
in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel
consumption generally results in lower emis-
sion of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con-
sumption. For more information read under the
heading, Reducing environmental impact.
Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the con-
cept "Clean inside and out" a concept that
encompasses a clean interior environment as
well as highly efficient emission control. In
many cases the exhaust emissions are well
below the applicable standards.
Clean air in the passenger compartment
A passenger compartment filter prevents dust
and pollen from entering the passenger com-
partment via the air intake.
A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Inte-
rior Air Quality System) ensures that the incom-
ing air is cleaner than the air in the traffic out-
side.
The system consists of an electronic sensor
and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni-
tored continuously and if there is an increase in
Introduction
10
the level of certain unhealthy gases such as
carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed.
Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic,
queues and tunnels for example.
The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone
and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon
filter.
Textile standard
The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea-
sant and comfortable, even for people with
contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.
Extreme attention has been given to choosing
environmentally-compatible materials. This
means that they also fulfil the requirements in
the Oeko-Tex 100 standard
1
, a major advance
towards a healthier passenger compartment
environment.
Oeko-Tex certification covers seatbelts, car-
pets and fabrics for example. The leather in the
upholstery undergoes chromium-free tanning
with plant substances and fulfils the certifica-
tion requirements.
Volvo workshops and the environment
Regular maintenance creates the conditions
for a long service life and low fuel consumption
for your car. In this way you contribute to a
cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops
are entrusted with the service and mainte-
nance of your car it becomes part of our sys-
tem. We make clear demands regarding the
way in which our workshops are designed in
order to prevent spills and discharges into the
environment. Our workshop staff have the
knowledge and the tools required to guarantee
good environmental care.
Reducing environmental impact
You can easily help reduce environmental
impact, for example, by driving economically
and by servicing and maintaining the car
according to the instructions in the owner's
manual.
The following advice will help you to do your bit
for the environment: (for further advice on how
you can reduce environmental impact and
drive economically, see pages 264, 202).
Decrease fuel consumption by choosing
ECO tyre pressure, see page 264.
A roof load and ski box increase air resis-
tance, leading to higher fuel consumption.
Remove them directly after use.
Remove unnecessary items from the car.
The greater the load the higher the fuel
consumption.
If the car is equipped with an engine block
heater, always use it before starting from
cold. This reduces fuel consumption and
exhaust emissions.
Drive gently and avoid braking too hard.
Drive in the highest gear possible. Low
engine speeds result in lower fuel con-
sumption.
Use engine braking to slow down.
Avoid letting the engine idle. Pay attention
to local regulations. Switch off the engine
when stationary for longer periods.
Always dispose of environmentally hazar-
dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in
an environmentally safe manner. We rec-
ommend that you consult an authorised
Volvo workshop for advice if you are uncer-
tain about the disposal of this type of
waste.
Service your car regularly.
High speed increases consumption con-
siderably due to increased wind resis-
tance. A doubling of speed increases wind
resistance 4 times.
These hints will help reduce fuel consumption
without increasing travel time or lessening the
enjoyment of driving. Apart from being kind to
your car, you'll be saving money - and the
Earth's resources.
1
More information on www.oekotex.com
Introduction
11
The owner's manual and the
environment
The FSC symbol shows that the paper pulp in
this publication comes from FSC certified for-
ests or other controlled sources.
G
0
2
0
8
7
1
Seatbelts ................................................................................................ 14
Airbag system (SRS - Airbag)................................................................. 17
Activating/deactivating the airbag*......................................................... 20
Side airbags (SIPS bags) ....................................................................... 22
Inflatable Curtain (IC) ............................................................................. 24
WHIPS .................................................................................................... 25
When the systems deploy ...................................................................... 27
Safety mode............................................................................................ 28
Child safety............................................................................................. 29
01
SAFETY
01 Safety
Seatbelts 01
General information
Heavy braking can have serious consequences
if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all
passengers use their seatbelts.
It is important that the seatbelt lies against the
body so it can provide maximum protection.
Do not lean the backrest too far back. The
seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal
seating position.
Putting on a seatbelt
Pull the seatbelt out slowly and secure it by
pressing the buckle into the lock. A loud "click"
indicates that the seatbelt has locked.
The buckles only fit the intended lock in the rear
seat*.
Releasing the seatbelt
Press the red lock button and then let the seat-
belt retract. If the seatbelt does not retract fully,
feed the seatbelt in by hand so that it does not
hang loose.
The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
if it is pulled out too quickly
during braking and acceleration
if the car leans heavily.
Keep in mind the following
do not use clips or anything else that can
prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly
ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or
caught on anything
the hip strap must be positioned low down
(not over the abdomen)
tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling
the diagonal shoulder belt as in the pre-
ceding illustration.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by the
airbag in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one per-
son.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts your-
self. Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop.
If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major
load, such as in conjunction with a collision,
the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some
of the protective characteristics of the seat-
belt may have been lost, even if it appears
to be undamaged. In addition, replace the
seatbelt if the belt is worn or damaged. The
new seatbelt must be type-approved and
intended for installation in the same position
as the replaced seatbelt.
01 Safety
Seatbelts 01
``
15
Seatbelts and pregnancy
G
0
2
0
9
9
8
The seatbelt should always be worn during
pregnancy. But it is then crucial that it be worn
in the correct way. The diagonal section should
wrap over the shoulder then be routed between
the breasts and to the side of the abdomen.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs
and as low as possible under the abdomen.
It must never be allowed to ride upward.
Remove all slack from the seatbelt and ensure
that it fits close to the body. In addition, check
that there are no twists in the seatbelt.
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
should adjust their seats and steering wheel
such that they can easily maintain control of the
vehicle as they drive (which means that they
must be able to easily operate the foot pedals
and steering wheel). The aim should be to posi-
tion the seat with as large a distance as possi-
ble between abdomen and steering wheel.
Seatbelt reminder
G
0
1
7
7
2
6
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten
their seatbelts by means of an audio and visual
reminder. The audio reminder is speed
dependent, and in some cases time depend-
ent. The visual reminder is located in the roof
console and the combined instrument panel.
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt
reminder system.
Rear seat
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
Provides information on which seatbelts
are being used in the rear seat. The mes-
sage is shown in the information display
when the seatbelts are being used or when
a rear door is opened. The message is
automatically cleared after approx. 30 sec-
onds or can be acknowledged manually by
pressing the direction indicator lever's
READ button.
Provides a warning if one of the rear seat-
belts is unfastened during travel. This
warning takes the form of a message on
the information display along with the
audio/visual signal. The warning stops
when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can
also be acknowledged manually by press-
ing the READ button.
The message on the information display show-
ing which seatbelts are in use is always avail-
able. Press the READ button to see stored
messages.
01 Safety
Seatbelts 01
16
Certain markets
An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remind
the driver and front seat passenger to use a
seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one. At
low speed, the audio reminder will sound for
the first 6 seconds.
Seatbelt tensioner
All the seatbelts are equipped with belt ten-
sioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner
tightens the seatbelt in the event of a suffi-
ciently violent collision. The seatbelt then pro-
vides more effective restraint for the occu-
pants.
01 Safety
Airbag system (SRS - Airbag) 01
``
17
Warning symbol on the combined
instrument panel
o
0 1
G
0
2
1
0
1
0
The airbag system is continuously monitored
by the system's control module. The warning
symbol in the combined instrument panel illu-
minates when the remote control key is in posi-
tion II or III. The symbol clears after
approx. 6 seconds provided the airbag system
is fault-free.
WARNING
If the warning symbol for the airbag system
remains illuminated or illuminates while driv-
ing, it means that the airbag system does
not have full functionality. The symbol indi-
cates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner sys-
tem, SIPS, the IC system or another fault in
the SRS system. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop
immediately.
As well as the warning symbol, a message may
appear on the information display in appropri-
ate cases. If the warning symbol malfunctions,
the warning triangle illuminates and SRS
Airbag Service required or SRS Airbag
Service urgent appears in the display. Volvo
recommends that you contact an authorised
Volvo workshop immediately.
Overview, airbag system
G
0
1
8
6
6
5
SRS system, left-hand drive.
G
0
1
8
6
6
6
SRS system, right-hand drive.
The SRS system consists of airbags and sen-
sors. A sufficiently violent collision trips the
sensors and the airbag(s) are inflated with hot
01 Safety
18
gas. To cushion the impact, the airbag deflates
when compressed. When this occurs, smoke
escapes into the car. This is completely nor-
mal. The entire process, including inflation and
deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of
a second.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop for repair.
Defective work in the airbag system could
cause malfunction and result in serious per-
sonal injury.
NOTE
The sensors react differently depending on
the course of the collision and whether or
not the seatbelts on the driver and passen-
ger side are used.
It is therefore possible that only one (or
none) of the airbags may inflate in a colli-
sion. The airbag system senses the force of
the collision on the car and adapts accord-
ingly so that one or more airbags are
deployed.
The capacity of the airbags is also adapted
to the collision force to which the vehicle is
subjected.
Location of the front passenger airbag in a left-
hand drive car.
Location of the front passenger airbag in a right-
hand drive car.
Airbag on the driver's side
G
0
2
1
0
1
1
The car has an SRS airbag (Supplemental
Restraint System) to supplement the protec-
tion afforded by the seatbelt on the driver's
side. This airbag is fitted into the centre of the
steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked
SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by the
airbag in the event of a collision.
01 Safety
19
Passenger airbag
The car has an airbag to supplement the pro-
tection afforded by the seatbelt on the passen-
ger side. This airbag is folded up into a com-
partment above the glovebox. Its cover panel
is marked SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and
backs against the backrest. Seatbelts must
be secured.
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the
dashboard where the passenger airbag is
located.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
is activated
1
.
Never allow a child to stand or sit in front of
the front passenger seat. No one shorter
than 140 cm should ever sit in the front pas-
senger seat if the airbag is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above
could endanger the life of the child.
Label Airbag
G
0
3
2
2
4
4
Label for airbag located on door pillar.
1
For information on how to activate/deactivate the airbag, see page 20.
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag* 01
Key switch off - PACOS
General information
The airbag for the front passenger seat can be
deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch,
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). For
information on how to activate/deactivate, see
under the heading Activating/deactivating.
Key switch off/switch
The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS)
is located on the passenger end of the instru-
ment panel and is accessible when the pas-
senger door is open, (see under the following
heading, "Switch PACOS"). Check that the
switch is in the required position. Volvo rec-
ommends that the remote control key's key
blade be used to change position.
For information on the key blade, see
page 43.
WARNING
could endanger the life of passengers in the
car.
WARNING
If the car is equipped with a front passenger
airbag, but has no switch (PACOS, Passen-
ger Airbag Cut Off Switch), then the airbag
is always activated.
WARNING
is activated and the symbol in the roof
console is illuminated. Failure to follow this
advice could endanger the life of the child.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas-
senger seat if the message in the roof panel
(see page 21) indicates that the airbag is
deactivated and if the warning symbol for
the airbag system is also displayed in the
combined instrument panel. This indicates
that there has been a severe malfunction.
Visit a workshop as soon as possible. Volvo
recommends that you contact an author-
ised Volvo workshop.
Activating/deactivating
G
0
1
9
0
3
0
Switch location.
The airbag is activated. With the switch in
this position, persons taller than 140 cm
can sit in the front passenger seat, but
never children in a child seat or on a
booster cushion.
The airbag is deactivated. With the switch
in this position, children in a child seat or
on a booster cushion can sit in the front
passenger seat, but never persons taller
than 140 cm.
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag* 01
WARNING
Activated airbag (passenger seat):
booster cushion on the front passenger seat
when the airbag is activated. This applies to
everyone shorter than 140 cm.
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in
the front passenger seat when the airbag is
deactivated.
could endanger life.
Messages
2
2
G
0
1
7
7
2
4
Indicator in the roof console showing that the pas-
senger airbag is deactivated.
A text message and a symbol in the roof panel
indicate that the airbag for the front passenger
seat is deactivated (see preceding illustration).
G
0
1
7
8
0
0
Indicator in the roof console showing that the pas-
senger airbag is activated.
A warning symbol in the roof panel indicates
that the airbag for the front passenger seat is
activated (see preceding illustration).
NOTE
When the remote control key is turned to
ignition position II or III the warning symbol
for the airbag is shown in the combined
instrument panel for approx. 6 seconds (see
page 17).
Following which, the indicator in the roof
console is illuminated showing the correct
status for the front passenger seat airbag.
For more information on the remote control
key's different ignition positions, see
page 71.
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01
22
Side airbag
G
0
3
2
9
4
9
In a side impact collision a large proportion of
the collision force is transferred by the SIPS
(Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pil-
lars, the floor, the roof and other structural
parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv-
er's and front passenger seats protect the
chest area and the hip and are an important
part of the SIPS.
The SIPS bag system consists of two main
components, side airbag and sensors. The
side airbags are located in the front seat backr-
ests.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that repairs are only
carried out by an authorised Volvo
workshop. Defective work in the SIPS-
bag system could cause malfunction
and result in serious personal injury.
Do not put objects in the area between
the outside of the seat and the door
panel, since this area is required by the
side airbag.
Volvo recommends the use only of car
seat covers approved by Volvo. Other
seat covers may impede the operation
of the side airbags.
The side airbag is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Child seats and side airbags
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the side airbag.
A child seat or booster cushion can be placed
on the front passenger seat provided that the
car does not have an activated
1
passenger air-
bag.
Location
G
0
2
4
3
7
7
Driver's seat, left-hand drive.
G
0
2
4
3
7
8
Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.
The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags
and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips
1
For information on activating/deactivating the airbag, see page 20.
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01
23
the sensors and the side airbags are inflated.
The airbag inflates between the occupant and
the door panel and thereby cushions the initial
impact. The airbag deflates when compressed
by the collision. The side airbag is normally only
deployed on the side of the collision.
Label, side airbag
G
0
3
2
2
5
4
Label for side airbag located on door pillar.
01 Safety
Inflatable Curtain (IC) 01
24
Properties
The inflatable curtain (IC) is a supplement to the
SIPS and SRS airbags. It is fitted in the head-
lining along both sides of the roof and protects
the car occupants sitting in the outer seats. A
sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the inflatable curtain is inflated. The inflat-
able curtain helps to prevent the driver and
passengers from striking their heads on the
inside of the car during a collision.
WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
handles in the roof. The hook is only
designed for light clothing (not for solid
objects such as umbrellas for example).
Do not screw or install anything onto the
car's headlining, door pillars or side panels.
This could compromise the intended pro-
tection. Volvo recommends that you only
ever use Volvo genuine parts that are
approved for placement in these areas.
WARNING
Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under
the top edge of the door windows. Other-
wise, the intended protection of the inflat-
able curtain, which is concealed in the head-
lining, may be compromised.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the
seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
01 Safety
WHIPS 01
``
25
Protection against whiplash injury
WHIPS
The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) con-
sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe-
cially designed head restraints in the front
seats. The system is actuated by a rear-end
collision, where the angle and speed of the col-
lision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all
have an influence.
WARNING
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Properties of the seat
When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front
seat backrests are lowered backward to alter
the seating position of the driver and front seat
passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash
injury.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
system yourself. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WHIPS system and child seats/booster
cushions
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the WHIPS system.
Correct seating position
For the best possible protection, the driver and
front seat passenger should sit in the centre of
the seat with as little space as possible
between the head and the head restraint.
Do not obstruct the WHIPS system
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the
driver's seat or the passenger seat.
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat back-
rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the
function of the WHIPS system.
01 Safety
WHIPS 01
26
Do not leave any objects on the rear seat.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the
corresponding front seat must be moved
forward so that it does not touch the folded
backrest.
WARNING
If a seat has been subjected to extreme
forces, such as due to a rear-end collision,
the WHIPS system must be checked. Volvo
recommends that it is checked by an
Part of the WHIPS system's protective
capacity may have been lost even if the
seats appear to be undamaged.
authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys-
tem checked even after a minor rear-end
collision.
01 Safety
When the systems deploy 01
27
When the systems deploy
System Triggered
Seatbelt tensioner,
front seat
In a frontal collision
and or side-impact
accident and or
rear-end collision
Seatbelt tensioner,
rear seat
In a frontal collision
Airbags (SRS) In a frontal collision
A
Side airbags (SIPS) In a side-impact
accident
A
Inflatable Curtain IC In a side-impact
accident
A
Whiplash protection
WHIPS
In a rear-end colli-
sion
A
The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a col-
lision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such
as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the
car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different
safety systems of the car are activated.
If the airbags have deployed, the following is
recommended:
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends
that you have it conveyed to an authorised
Volvo workshop. Do not drive with
deployed airbags.
Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to handle the
replacement of components in the car's
safety systems.
Always contact a doctor.
NOTE
The SRS, SIPS, IC and belt tensioner sys-
tems are deployed only once during a colli-
sion.
WARNING
The airbag control module is located in the
centre console. If the centre console is
drenched with water or other liquid, discon-
nect the battery cables. Do not attempt to
start the car since the airbags may deploy.
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that
you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo
workshop.
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They
can make steering difficult. Other safety
systems may also be damaged. The smoke
and dust created when the airbags are
deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/
injury after intensive exposure. In case of
irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid
deployment sequence and airbag fabric
may cause friction and skin burns.
01 Safety
Safety mode 01
28
Reduced functionality
G
0
2
1
0
6
2
If the car is involved in a collision, the text
Safety mode See manual may appear on the
information display. This means that the car
has reduced functionality. Safety mode is a
protective state that is enforced when the col-
lision may have damaged any of the car's vital
functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for
one of the safety systems, or the brake system.
Attempting to start the car
First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car.
There must be no smell of fuel either.
If everything seems normal and you have
checked for indications of fuel leakage, you
may attempt to start the car.
Firstly, remove the remote control key and then
reinsert it. The car's electronics will then try to
reset themselves to normal mode. Then try to
start the car. If the message Safety mode See
manual is still shown on the display then the
car must not be driven or towed, but a vehicle
recovery service used instead. Even if the car
appears to be driveable, hidden damage may
make the car impossible to control once mov-
ing.
Moving the car
If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode
See manual has been reset, the car can be
moved carefully out of a dangerous position.
Do not move the car further than necessary.
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset the
electronics yourself if the car has been in
safety mode. This could result in personal
injury or the car not functioning as normal.
Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to check and
restore the car to normal status after Safety
mode See manual has been displayed.
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to
restart the car if it smells of fuel when the
Safety mode message is displayed. Leave
the car at once.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its loca-
tion. Volvo recommends that it is transpor-
ted to an authorised Volvo workshop.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
``
29
Children should sit comfortably and
safely
The position of a child in the car and the choice
of equipment are dictated by the child's weight
and size, for more information, see page 30.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the placement of
children in cars vary from country to coun-
try. Check what does apply.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child
to sit on the knee of a passenger.
Volvo's own child safety equipment is
designed for your car. Volvo recommends that
you use Volvo genuine equipment to best
ensure that the mounting points and attach-
ments are correctly positioned and are suffi-
ciently strong.
NOTE
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety products, contact the manufacturer
for clearer instructions.
Child seats
G
0
2
0
7
3
9
Child seats and airbags are not compatible.
Volvo has child safety products that are
designed for and tested by Volvo.
NOTE
When using child safety products it is
important to read the installation instruc-
tions included.
Do not attach the straps for the child seat to
the horizontal adjustment bar, springs, rails or
beams under the seat. Sharp edges can dam-
age the straps.
Look in the installation instructions for the child
seat for the correct fitting.
Location of child seats
You may place:
a child seat/booster cushion on the pas-
senger seat, provided the passenger air-
bag is not activated
1
.
a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat.
Always place a child in the rear seat if the pas-
senger airbag is activated. A child sitting on the
front passenger seat could suffer serious injury
if the airbag deploys.
WARNING
(SRS) is activated.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit
in the front passenger seat if the airbag
(SRS) is activated.
could endanger the life of the child.
1
For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 20.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
30
WARNING
Booster cushions/child seats with steel
braces or some other design that could rest
on the seatbelt buckle's opening button
must not be used, as they could cause the
seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
Do not allow the upper section of the child
seat to rest against the windscreen.
Label Airbag
Label located on instrument panel end face on the
passenger side.
Recommended child seats
2
Weight/Age Front seat Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 0
max 10 kg
(0 9 months)
and
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Volvo Child seat rear-facing child
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt
and straps.
Type approval: E5 03135
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt,
straps and support legs.
Volvo infant seat - rear-facing child
seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture
system.
Volvo infant seat - rear-facing child
seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture
system.
Volvo infant seat rear-facing child
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
2
With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
``
31
Group 1
9-18 kg
(9-36 months)
and straps.
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt,
straps and support legs.
Volvo turnable child seat rear-facing
child seat, secured with the car's seat-
belt and straps.
belt and straps.
Britax Fixway rear-facing child seat,
secured with the ISOFIX fixture system
and straps.
Britax Fixway rear-facing child seat,
secured with the ISOFIX fixture system
and straps.
Group 2, 15-25 kg, 3-6
yr
Volvo turnable child seat - front-facing
belt.
belt.
belt.
belt and straps.
belt and straps.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
(3-12 yr)
Volvo Booster cushion with or with-
out backrest.
out backrest.
out backrest.
Volvo booster cushion with backrest.
Volvo 2-stage Integrated booster
cushion available as a factory fitted
option.
Integrated two-stage booster
cushions*
G
0
1
7
8
7
5
Correct position, the seatbelt is positioned above
the shoulder.
G
0
1
7
7
1
9
Incorrect position, the head must not be posi-
tioned above the head restraint and the seatbelt
must not be below the shoulder.
The booster cushions are specially designed to
provide optimum safety. In combination with
the seatbelt they are approved for children who
weigh between 15 and 36 kg and who are 95
to 140 cm in height.
Check before driving that:
the 2-stage integrated booster cushion is
correctly set (see table below) and in
locked position
the seatbelt is in contact with the child's
body and is not slack or twisted
01 Safety
Child safety 01
``
33
the seatbelt does not lie across the child's
throat or below the shoulder (see preced-
ing illustrations)
the lap section of the seatbelt is positioned
low over the pelvis to provide optimal pro-
tection.
Stage 1 Stage 2
Weight 22-36 kg 15-25 kg
Length 115-140 cm 95-120 cm
For instructions on adjusting the booster cush-
ion's two levels, see pages 3234.
Raising the two-stage booster cushion
Stage 1
Pull the handle forward and up in order to
release the booster cushion.
G
0
1
7
6
9
7
Press the booster cushion backwards to
lock.
Stage 2
Start from the lower stage. Press the but-
ton.
G
0
1
7
7
8
4
Lift the booster cushion up at the front edge
and press it back against the backrest to lock.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that repair or replace-
ment is only carried out by an authorised
Volvo workshop. Do not make any modifi-
cations or additions to the booster cushion.
If an integrated booster cushion has been
subjected to a major load, such as in con-
junction with a collision, the entire booster
cushion must be replaced. Even if the
booster cushion appears to be undamaged,
it may not afford the same level of protec-
tion. The booster cushion must also be
replaced if it is heavily worn.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
34
NOTE
It is not possible to adjust the booster cush-
ion from stage 2 to stage 1. It must first be
reset by being fully folded into the seat
cushion. Refer to the heading below, Low-
ering the two-stage booster cushion.
Lowering the two-stage booster cushion
Lowering can take place from both the upper
and lower stage to fully lowered position in the
cushion. However, it is not possible to adjust
the booster cushion from the upper stage to
the lower stage.
Pull the handle forwards to release the
cushion.
Press down with your hand in the centre of
the cushion in order to lock it.
WARNING
If the instructions regarding the two-stage
booster cushion are not followed then this
could cause serious injury to a child in the
event of an accident.
IMPORTANT
Check that there are no loose objects (e.g.
toys) left behind in the space under the
cushion before lowering.
NOTE
The booster cushion must be lowered first
when lowering the backrest.
Child safety locks, rear doors
The controls for operating the rear door power
windows and the rear door opening handles
can be blocked from opening from the inside.
For more information, see page 55.
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats
G
0
2
1
0
6
4
Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system
are concealed behind the lower section of the
rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.
The location of the mounting points is indicated
by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see pre-
ceding illustration).
Press the seat cushion down to access the
mounting points.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
``
35
NOTE
The ISOFIX fixture system is an accessory
for the passenger seat.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to
the ISOFIX mounting points.
Size classes
Child seats are in different sizes cars are in
different sizes. This means that not all child
seats are suitable for all seats in all car models.
Consequently, a size classification has been
introduced for child seats using the ISOFIX fix-
ture system in order to assist users in choosing
the correct child seat (see the following table).
Size
class
Description
A Full size, front-facing child
seat
B Reduced size (alt. 1), front-
facing child seat
Size
class
Description
B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front-
facing child seat
C Full size, rear-facing child
seat
D Reduced size, rear-facing
child seat
E Rear-facing infant seat
F Transverse infant seat, left-
hand
G Transverse infant seat, right-
hand
WARNING
Never place a child in the passenger seat if
the car is equipped with an activated airbag.
NOTE
If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi-
cation then the car model must be included
on the child seat's vehicle list.
NOTE
authorised Volvo dealer for recommenda-
tions about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo
recommends.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
36
Types of ISOFIX child seat
Type of child seat Weight (Age) Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Infant seat transverse max. 10 kg (0-9 months) F - -
G - -
Infant seat, rear-facing max. 10 kg (0-9 months) E OK OK
Infant seat, rear-facing max. 13 kg (0 12 months) E OK OK
D OK OK
C - OK
Child seat, rear-facing 9 18 kg (9 36 months) D OK OK
C - OK
Front-facing child seat 9 18 kg (9 36 months) B OK
A
OK
A
B1 OK
A
OK
A
A OK
A
OK
A
A
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
37
Upper mounting points for child seats
G
0
1
7
6
7
6
The car is equipped with upper mounting
points for certain front-facing child seats.
These mounting points are located on the rear
of the seat.
The upper mounting points are primarily
intended for use with front-facing child seats.
Volvo recommends that small children should
sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age
as possible.
NOTE
For cars with folding head restraints on the
outside seats the head restraints should be
folded to facilitate the installation of this
type of child seat.
NOTE
For cars equipped with a cargo area cover
over the cargo area, this must be removed
before a child seat can be fitted in the
mounting points.
For detailed information on how the child seat
should be tensioned in the upper mounting
points, see the seat manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
WARNING
The child seat's straps must always be
routed under the rear head restraints before
being tensioned at the mounting point.
Remote control key/key blade................................................................ 40
Privacy locking*....................................................................................... 45
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*...................................... 46
Keyless drive*.......................................................................................... 48
Locking/unlocking................................................................................... 50
Child safety locks.................................................................................... 55
Alarm*...................................................................................................... 56
02
LOCKS AND ALARM
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
General
The car is supplied with two remote control
keys or two PCCs (Personal Car
Communicator). They are used to start the car
and for locking and unlocking.
More remote control keys can be ordered up
to six can be programmed and used for the
same car.
The PCC has increased functionality com-
pared with the remote control key. The contin-
uation of this chapter describes the functions
available in both the PCC and the remote con-
trol key.
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Always remember to switch off the power
supply to power windows and sunroof by
removing the remote control key if the driver
leaves the car.
Detachable key blade
A remote control key contains a detachable
metal key blade for mechanical locking/
unlocking of the driver's door, glovebox and
tailgate (privacy locking).
For privacy locking, see page 45.
The key blade is also used to deactivate/acti-
vate PACOS*, see page 20.
For key blade functions, see page 43.
The key blade's unique code is provided by
authorised Volvo workshops, which are rec-
ommended when ordering new key blades.
Loss of a remote control key
If you lose a remote control key then new ones
can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended. The remain-
ing remote control keys must then be taken to
the workshop. The code of the missing remote
control key must be erased from the system as
a theft prevention measure.
The current number of keys registered to the
car can be checked under Car settings Car
Key memory Number of keys. For a
description of the menu system, see
page 120.
Key memory door mirrors and driver's
seat
The settings are automatically connected to
each respective remote control key, see pages
74 and 92.
The function can be activated/deactivated
under Car settings Car Key memory
Seat & mirror positions. For a description of
the menu system, see page 120.
For cars with Keyless drive function, see
page 48.
Indicator for locking/unlocking
When the car is locked or unlocked using the
remote control key, the direction indicators
confirm that locking/unlocking was correctly
performed:
Locking - one flash
Unlocking - two flashes.
After locking the indication is only given if all
locks are activated once the doors have been
closed.
under Car settings Light settings Lock
confirmation light and Car settings Light
settings Unlock confirmation light.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 120.
Immobiliser
Each remote control key has a unique code.
The car can only be started with the correct
remote control key with the correct code.
The following error messages in the combined
instrument panel's information display are rela-
ted to the electronic immobiliser:
02 Locks and alarm
02
``
Message Specification
Key error Try again Error reading remote
control key during
start. Try to start the
car again.
Car key not found Applies only to the
PCC's Keyless drive
function. Errors
reading the PCC
during starting. Try
to start the car
again.
Immobiliser Try
start again
Remote control key
function error during
start. If the fault per-
sists the recommen-
dation is to contact
an authorised Volvo
workshop.
For starting the car, see page 97.
Functions
G
0
2
1
0
7
8
Remote control key.
Locking
Unlocking
Approach light duration
Tailgate
Panic function
G
0
2
1
0
7
9
PCC* (Personal Car Communicator).
Information
Function buttons
Locking Locks the doors and tailgate
and then activates the alarm.
Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to close all
the windows and sunroof* simultaneously.
WARNING
If the sunroof and windows are closed using
the remote control key, check that no one is
in danger of getting hands caught.
Unlocking Unlocks the doors and tail-
gate while the alarm is deactivated.
02 Locks and alarm
02
The function can be changed from unlocking
all doors simultaneously, to opening the driv-
er's door after one press of the button and,
after a further press of the button - within
10 seconds - opening the remaining doors.
The function is changed under Car settings
Lock settings Doors unlock. For a
description of the menu system, see
page 120.
Approach lighting Used to switch on the
car's lighting at a distance. For more informa-
tion, see page 83.
Tailgate - Unlocks and disarms the alarm
for the tailgate only. On cars with power tail-
gate* the tailgate is opened after the button is
kept depressed. For more information, see
page 52.
Panic function Used to attract attention
in an emergency.
Press and hold the red button for at least 3 sec-
onds or press it twice within 3 seconds to acti-
vate the direction indicators and the horn.
The function can be turned off with the same
button once it has been active for at least
5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches off
automatically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds.
Range
The remote control key has a range of up to
20 m from the car.
NOTE
The remote control key functions can be
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions etc. The
car can always be locked/unlocked using
the key blade, see page 44.
Unique functions PCC*
G
0
2
1
0
8
0
Information button
Indicator lamps
Using the information button enables access to
certain information from the car via the indica-
tor lamps.
Using the information button
Press the information button .

> All indicator lamps flash for approxi-
mately 7 seconds and the light travels
around on the PCC. This indicates that
information from the car has been read.
If any of the other buttons are pressed
during this time then the reading is inter-
rupted.
NOTE
If none of the indicator lamps illuminates
with repeated use of the information button
and in different locations (as well as after 7
seconds and after the light has travelled
around on the PCC), contact a workshop -
an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Indicator lamps display information in accord-
ance with the following illustration:
02 Locks and alarm
02
``
G
0
3
0
2
6
2
Green continuous light the car is locked.
Yellow continuous light the car is
unlocked.
Red light flashing alternately in the two
indicator lamps indicates, using the HBS
(Heart Beat Sensor) that someone may be
in the car. This indication is only displayed
if the alarm was triggered.
Red continuous light the alarm has been
triggered.
Range
The PCC lock functions have a range of up to
20 m from the car.
The approach lighting, panic function and the
functions controlled by the information button
have a range of up to a maximum of 100 m from
the car.
NOTE
The information button functions can be
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions etc.
Out of PCC range
If the PCC is too far away from the car for the
information to be read then the status the car
was last left in is shown, without the light trav-
elling around on the PCC.
If several PCCs are used for the car then it is
only the PCC last used for locking/unlocking
that shows correct status.
NOTE
If no indicator lamps illuminate when the
information button is used then this can be
because the last communication between
the PCC and the car was disrupted by sur-
rounding radio waves, buildings, topo-
graphical conditions etc.
Heart Beat Sensor
The function operates using an HBS (Heart
Beat Sensor). HBS is a supplement to the car's
alarm system and can indicate at a distance
whether anybody is in the car. This indication
is only displayed if the alarm was triggered.
The HBS detects an individual's heartbeat that
is transmitted to the car's bodywork. For this
reason the function of the HBS can be distur-
bed in an environment subject to noise and
vibration.
Detachable key blade
Using the remote control key's detachable key
blade:
the driver's door can be opened manually
if central locking cannot be activated with
the remote control key
access to the glovebox and cargo area
(privacy locking*) is blocked, see
page 45
PACOS* activated/deactivated, see
page 20.
02 Locks and alarm
02
44
Removing the key blade
G
0
2
1
0
8
2
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
At the same time pull the key blade straight
out backwards.
Inserting the key blade
Carefully refit the key blade in place in the
remote control key, to avoid damaging it.
1. Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into its
slot.
2. Lightly press the key blade. You should
hear a "click" when the key blade is locked
in.
Unlocking doors with the key blade
If central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are dis-
charged, then the driver's door can be opened
as follows:
NOTE
When the driver's door is unlocked using the
key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig-
gered.
1. Unlock the driver's door using the key
blade in the door handle's keyhole.
2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting the
remote control key in the ignition switch.
02 Locks and alarm
Privacy locking*
02
Privacy locking
G
0
1
7
8
6
9
Active locks for remote control key, with key blade
and privacy locking not activated.
G
0
1
7
8
7
0
Active locks for remote control key, without key
blade and privacy locking activated.
The privacy locking function is intended for
when the car is left for service, with a hotel
parking valet or similar. The glovebox is then
locked and the tailgate lock is disconnected
from the central locking. The tailgate cannot be
opened with either the central locking button in
the front doors or the remote control key.
This means that the remote control key without
key blade can only be used to activate/deacti-
vate the alarm, to open the doors and to drive
the car.
The remote control key is handed over without
the detachable key blade which the owner then
keeps.
NOTE
Do not forget to pull out the cargo cover
over the cargo area before closing the tail-
gate, see page 213.
G
0
2
0
5
0
8
Activating privacy locking.
To activate privacy locking:
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock.
Turn the key blade 180 degrees clockwise.
Pull out the key blade. The information dis-
play shows a message at the same time.
NOTE
Do not reinsert the key blade into the remote
control key but keep it in a safe place
instead.
Deactivation takes place in reverse order.
For information on locking the glovebox only,
see page 51.
02 Locks and alarm
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*
02
Replacing the battery
The batteries should be replaced if:
the information symbol is illuminated and
the display shows Replace car key
battery
and/or
the locks repeatedly do not react to signals
from the remote control key within
20 metres from the car.
Opening
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the
side.
At the same time pull the key blade
straight out backwards.
Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the
hole behind the spring-loaded catch and
gently prize the remote control key up.
NOTE
Turn the remote control key over with the
buttons facing up, this is to avoid the bat-
teries falling out when it is opened.
IMPORTANT
Avoid touching the battery and its terminals
with your fingers, as this could damage their
functionality.
Battery replacement
Closely study how the battery/batteries are
secured on the inside of the cover, with
regard to their (+) and () sides.
Remove control key (1 battery)
1. Carefully prize out the battery.
2. Install a new one with the (+) side down.
PCC* (2 batteries)
1. Carefully prize out the batteries.
2. First install one new one with the (+) side
up.
3. Position the white plastic tab in between
and finally install a second new battery with
the (+) side down.
Battery type
Use batteries with the designation CR2430, 3V
- one in the remote control key and two in the
PCC.
Assembly
1. Press the remote control key together.
2. Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into its
slot.
3. Lightly press the key blade. You should
hear a "click" when the key blade is locked
in.
02 Locks and alarm
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*
02
IMPORTANT
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally-friendly way.
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
02
Keyless drive (only PCC)
Keyless lock and ignition system
The keyless drive function in the PCC allows
the car to be unlocked, driven and locked with-
out the need for a key. You simply have to have
the PCC with you. The system makes it easier
and more convenient to open the car, e.g.
when your hands are full.
The car's two PCCs incorporate the Keyless
function. Additional PCCs can be ordered.
PCC range
In order to open a door or the tailgate, a PCC
must be no more than approx. 1.5 metres from
the car door handle or tailgate. This means that
the person who wishes to lock or unlock a door
must have the PCC with him or her. It is not
possible to lock or unlock a door if the PCC is
on the opposite side of the car.
The red rings in the preceding illustration indi-
cate the range covered by the system's anten-
nas.
If all PCCs are removed from the car when the
engine is running or key position II is active
(see page 71) and if all doors are closed, then
a warning message is shown in the information
display and an audio reminder signal sounds at
the same time.
The warning message clears and the audio
reminder signal stops when the PCC is brought
back to the car after:
a door has been opened and closed
the PCC is inserted into the ignition switch
the READ button has been pressed.
Handling the PCC safely
If a PCC with keyless drive function is left in the
car, it is deactivated temporarily when the car
is locked. This prevents unauthorised entry.
However, if someone breaks into the car,
opens the door and finds the PCC, it can be
reactivated. It is therefore important to handle
all PCCs with great care.
IMPORTANT
Never leave a PCC behind in the car.
Interference to PCC function
Electromagnetic fields and screening can inter-
fere with the keyless drive system. For this rea-
son, do not place the PCC near mobile phones
or metallic objects.
If interference is experienced nonetheless, use
the PCC and key blade in the normal way, see
page 41.
Unlocking
Open the doors with the door handles or open
the tailgate with the tailgate's handle.
Unlocking with the key blade
If the keyless drive function in the PCC is not
operating, then the driver's door can be
unlocked with the key blade. In this case cen-
tral locking is not activated.
NOTE
Unlocking with the key blade triggers the
alarm. For deactivation, see page 57.
Key memory driver's seat and door
mirrors
PCC memory function
If several people each with a PCC approach the
car, then the settings for seat and mirrors are
implemented for the person who opens the
driver's door.
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
02
After the driver's door has been opened by
person A with PCC A, but person B with PCC
B shall drive, the settings can be changed in
three ways:
Standing by the driver's door, or sitting
behind the steering wheel, person B
presses their PCC's unlock button, see
page 41.
Select one of three possible memories for
seat adjustment with seat button 1-3, see
page 74.
Adjust seat and mirrors manually, see
page 73 and 92.
Locking
Lock the doors and the tailgate by pressing the
lock button on one of the door handles on the
outside.
All doors and the tailgate must be closed
before the car can be locked. Otherwise the car
will not be locked.
NOTE
On cars with automatic transmission, the
gear selector must be set in the P position
otherwise the car cannot be locked or the
alarm armed.
Lock settings
The keyless function can be adapted to specify
which of the car doors are to be unlocked,
under Car settings Lock settings
Keyless entry. For a description of the menu
system, see page 120.
Antenna location
G
0
2
1
1
7
9
The keyless system has a number of integrated
antennae located around the car:
Tailgate, by wiper motor
Door handle, left rear
Roof, above centre rear seat
Cargo area, central and furthest in under
the floor
Door handle, right rear
Centre console, under the rear section
Centre console, under the front section.
WARNING
People with pacemaker operations should
not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless
system's antennae with their pacemaker.
This is to prevent interference between the
pacemaker and the keyless system.
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
From the outside
The remote control key locks/unlocks all doors
and the tailgate simultaneously. The lock but-
tons and door handles are disengaged during
locking which also prevents opening from the
inside, so-called deadlocks function*, see
page 53.
If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the
remote control key, the battery may be dis-
charged - lock or unlock the door with the
detachable key blade; see page 44.
WARNING
Be aware that there is a risk that you can be
locked in the car if it is locked from the out-
side.
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within 2 minutes of unlocking, all are locked
again automatically. This function reduces the
risk that the car is left unlocked unintentionally.
(For cars with alarm, see page 56.)
From the inside
All of the doors and the tailgate can be locked
or unlocked simultaneously using the central
locking button on either front door. Press one
side of the button to lock - the other side
to unlock.
Unlocking
A door can be unlocked from the inside in two
different ways:
Press the central locking button .
Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to also
open all the side windows* simultaneously.
Pull the door handle once and release - the
door is unlocked. Pull the door handle
again to open the door.
Locking
Press the central locking button after the
front doors have been closed. Press and hold
(at least 4 seconds) to also close all the side
windows and the sunroof* simultaneously.
All the doors can be locked manually with their
respective lock buttons after the door has been
closed.
Global opening
Press and hold the central locking button
(at least 4 seconds) to also open all the win-
dows simultaneously - for example, to quickly
ventilate the passenger compartment during
hot weather.
Automatic locking
The doors and tailgate are locked automati-
cally when the car starts to move.
under Car settings Lock settings
Doors automatic lock. (For a description of
the menu system, see page 120.)
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
``
Glovebox
G
0
2
0
5
4
8
The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked
using the remote control key's detachable key
blade. (For information on the key blade, see
page 44).
Locking the glovebox:
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock.
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.
The keyhole is horizontal in the locked
position.
Pull out the key blade.
Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order.
For information on privacy locking, see
page 45.
Tailgate
Unlocking with the remote control key
The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed*,
and the tailgate unlocked and opened on its
own* by using the remote control key.
NOTE
On cars with the power operated tailgate
option, the tailgate is opened otherwise it
is only unlocked.
If the car is equipped with an alarm* the alarm
indicator on the instrument panel stops to
show that alarm for the whole of the car is not
armed. The alarm's level and movement sen-
sors and the sensors for opening the tailgate
are automatically disconnected.
The doors remain locked and armed.
NOTE
When the tailgate is closed it remains
unlocked until the car is relocked with the
remote control key's lock button.
Unlocking the car from inside
To unlock and open* the tailgate.
Press the lighting panel button (1).
Locking with the remote control key
Press the remote control key button for lock-
ing, see page 41.
If the car is equipped with an alarm* the alarm
indicator on the instrument panel starts to
flash, which means that the alarm is armed.
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
Power operated tailgate*
G
0
1
7
8
7
6
IMPORTANT
Pay attention to the height of the roof when
using power operation. Do not use power
tailgate operation with low roof heights, see
under the heading "Interrupt opening/clos-
ing the tailgate".
NOTE
If the system has been operating con-
tinuously for more than 60 seconds then
it is switched off to avoid overloading. It
can be used again after about 10
minutes.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected then the cover must be
opened and closed manually once in
order to reset the system.
Snow and wind
If the tailgate is forced down by something just
when it is being opened, e.g. snow, ice or
strong wind, and this causes the tailgate to
lower, then it is closed automatically.
Pinch protection
If something with sufficient resistance prevents
the tailgate from opening/closing then the
pinch protection is activated.
During opening - power tailgate operation
is deactivated and the tailgate is disen-
gaged.
During closing - the tailgate returns to the
fully open position.
WARNING
Pay attention to the risk of crushing when
opening/closing. Before starting to open/
close; make sure that there is nobody close
to the tailgate as a crushing injury could
have serious consequences.
Always operate the tailgate with caution.
Manual tailgate operation
The system is disengaged if the rubberised
pressure plate beneath the outside handle is
actuated a second time. The tailgate can then
be operated manually.
Opening the tailgate
The tailgate can be opened three
ways (two of which involve this but-
ton):
Long press on the tailgate button in the
lighting panel - hold the button depressed
until the tailgate starts to open.
Long press on the remote control button
for the tailgate - hold the button depressed
until the tailgate starts to open.
Lightly press the rubberised pressure plate
beneath the outside handle and raise the
tailgate.
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
``
Closing the tailgate
Close using this button on the tailgate
or manually.
Press the tailgate's button the tailgate
closes automatically.
Stop the opening/closing of the tailgate
This can be done four ways (of which
three involve this button):
Press the tailgate button in the lighting
panel
Press the tailgate button on the remote
control
Press the tailgate button on the tailgate
Press the rubberised pressure plate
beneath the outside handle.
Tailgate movement is stopped following the
same pattern as when pinch protection is trig-
gered. Refer to this chapter's section with the
heading "Pinch protection".
Deadlocks*
When deadlocked, the doors cannot be
opened from the inside if they are locked.
The deadlocks are activated with the remote
control key and are set after a 10 second delay
after the doors are locked.
The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock
state with the remote control key. The driver's
door can also be unlocked with the detachable
key blade.
Temporary deactivation
Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
Navigation
ENTER
MENU
EXIT
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
doors must be locked from the outside, then
the deadlocks function can be temporarily
switched off. This is carried out as follows:
1. Access the menu system under Car
settings (for a detailed description of the
menu system, see page 120).
2. Select Reduced guard.
3. Select Activate once.
> The instrument panel display shows the
message Reduced guard See
manual and the deadlocks function is
switched off when the car is locked.
or
Select Ask on exit.
> Each time the engine is switched off the
audio system's display shows the mes-
sage ENTER reduces protection until
the engine is started again. Press
EXIT to cancel - then select one of the
alternatives.
If the deadlocks function shall be switched
off
Press ENTER and lock the car. (If the car
is equipped with an alarm with movement
and tilt detectors* then these are switched
off at the same time, see page 57.)
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
54
> The next time the engine is started, the
system is reset to zero and the instru-
ment panel display shows the message
Full guard at which the deadlocks func-
tion and the alarm's movement and tilt
detectors are re-engaged.
If the locking system shall not be changed
Select no options at all and lock the car.
or
Press EXIT and lock the car.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with an alarm:
Remember that the car's alarm is armed
when the car is locked.
If any of the doors are opened from the
inside then the alarm will be triggered.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car
without first deactivating the deadlocks to
avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.
02 Locks and alarm
Child safety locks
02
Manual blocking of the rear doors
G
0
2
1
0
7
7
The child safety locks are located on the trailing
edge of the rear doors and are only accessible
when the doors are open.
Use the key blade to turn the lock and thus
activate or deactivate the child safety lock.
The door cannot be opened from inside.
The doors can be opened from inside.
NOTE
Cars with electric child safety locks do not
have manual child locks.
Electrical locking of the rear doors and
power windows*
G
0
1
9
3
0
0
When the electric child safety lock is active:
the rear windows can only be opened with
the driver's door control panel
the rear doors cannot be opened from the
inside.
1. Child safety locks are activated/deacti-
vated in ignition position I or II see
page 71.
2. Press the button in the driver's door control
panel.
> The information display shows a mes-
sage.
The lamp on the switch illuminates when
the locks are activated.
02 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
02
General
The alarm is triggered if:
a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened
a non-approved remote control key is used
or if an attempt is made to force the ignition
switch
a movement is detected in the passenger
compartment (if fitted with a movement
detector*)
the car is raised or towed away (if fitted
with a tilt detector*)
the battery's cable is disconnected
anyone tries to disconnect the siren.
If there is a fault in the alarm system, the infor-
mation display shows a message. In which
case, contact a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
NOTE
The movement detectors trigger the alarm
in the event of movements in the passenger
compartment. For this reason the alarm
could be triggered if the car is left with a
window open or if an electric passenger
compartment heater is used.
To avoid this: Close the windows when leav-
ing the car and aim the air from the passen-
ger compartment heater so that it is not
directed up into the passenger compart-
ment.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm
system components. All such attempts
could affect the terms of insurance.
Alarm indicator
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates
the alarm system's status:
LED not lit Alarm not armed
The LED flashes once every other second
Alarm is armed
The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the
alarm (and until the remote control key is
inserted in the ignition switch and key posi-
tion I is selected) Alarm has been trig-
gered.
Arming the alarm
Press the remote control key lock button.
Disarming the alarm
Press the remote control key unlock but-
ton.
02 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
02
``
Deactivating a triggered alarm
Press the remote control key unlock button
or insert the remote control key in the igni-
tion switch.
Other alarm functions
Automatic re-arming of the alarm
This function prevents the car being left with
alarm disarmed unintentionally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control
key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the
doors or the tailgate is opened within
2 minutes, then the alarm is automatically re-
armed. The car is relocked at the same time.
Alarm signals
When the alarm is triggered, the following hap-
pens:
A siren sounds for less than 30 seconds.
The siren has its own battery which works
independently of the car battery.
The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes
or until the alarm has been deactivated.
Remote control key not working
If the remote control key is not working, the
alarm can still be switched off and the car
started as follows:
1. Open the driver's door with the key blade.
> The alarm is triggered and the siren
sounds.
2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch.
> The alarm is deactivated. The alarm
indicator flashes quickly until the remote
control key is inserted.
Reduced alarm level
Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
Navigation
ENTER
MENU
EXIT
To avoid inadvertently triggering of the alarm -
for example when leaving a dog in the car or
during a ferry crossing - the movement and tilt
detectors can be temporarily switched off. This
is carried out as follows:
1. Access the menu system under Car
settings (for a detailed description of the
menu system, see page 120).
2. Select Reduced guard.
3. Select Activate once:
> The instrument panel display shows the
message Reduced guard See
manual and the movement and tilt
detectors are switched off when the car
is locked.
or
Select Ask on exit.
> Each time the engine is switched off the
audio system's display shows the mes-
sage ENTER to reduce guard until
the car has been started. Press EXIT
to cancel. - then select one of the alter-
natives.
If the movement and tilt detectors shall be
switched off:
Press ENTER and lock the car. (If the car
is equipped with the deadlocks function*
then it is switched off at the same time, see
page 53.)
02 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
02
> The next time the engine is started, the
system is reset to zero and the instru-
ment panel display shows the message
Full guard at which the movement and
tilt detectors and the deadlocks function
are re-engaged.
If the detectors shall not be switched off:
Select no options at all and lock the car.
or
Press EXIT and lock the car.
Testing the alarm system
Testing the movement detector in the
passenger compartment
1. Close all windows. Remain in the car.
2. Arming the alarm, see page 56.
3. Wait 15 seconds.
4. Trigger the alarm by moving your arms for-
ward and back at backrest height.
> A siren sounds and all direction indica-
tors flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car
with the remote control key.
Testing the alarm sensors in the doors
1. Arming the alarm, see page 56.
2. Wait 15 seconds.
3. Unlock the driver's door using the key
blade.
4. Open the driver's door.
tors flash.
Testing the alarm sensors in the bonnet
1. Sit in the car and deactivate the alarm, see
page 56.
2. Arm the alarm, see page 56. Remain in the
car and lock the doors with the button on
the remote control key.
3. Wait 15 seconds.
4. Open the bonnet with the handle under the
dashboard.
tors flash.
02 Locks and alarm
02
59
G
0
2
0
9
1
2
Instruments and controls........................................................................ 62
Key positions.......................................................................................... 71
Seats....................................................................................................... 73
Steering wheel........................................................................................ 77
Lighting................................................................................................... 78
Wipers and washing................................................................................ 87
Windows, rearview and door mirrors...................................................... 90
Compass*................................................................................................ 94
Power sunroof*....................................................................................... 95
Starting the engine.................................................................................. 97
Starting the engine Flexifuel................................................................. 99
Starting the engine external battery................................................... 101
Gearboxes............................................................................................. 102
All-wheel drive AWD*......................................................................... 107
Foot brake............................................................................................. 108
Hill Descent Control (HDC)................................................................... 110
Parking brake........................................................................................ 112
HomeLink
*.......................................................................................... 115
03
YOUR DRI VI NG ENVI RONMENT
Instruments and controls
03
62
Instrument overview
Left-hand drive.
03
``
Function Page
Menus and messages,
direction indicators,
main/dipped beam, trip
computer
78,
81, 123,
155
Cruise control 160, 161
Horn, airbags 18, 77
Combined instrument
panel
65, 69
Menu, audio and phone
control
120,
137, 191
Ignition switch 71
Start/stop button 97
Hazard warning flashers 81
Door handle -
Control panel 50, 55,
90, 92
Menu control and audio
system
120, 138
Climate control, ECC 128
Function Page
Gear selector 102
Controls for active chas-
sis (Four-C)*
159
Wipers and washing 87, 88
Steering wheel adjust-
ment
77
Parking brake* 112
Bonnet opener 226
Seat adjustment* 73
Headlamp control,
opener for fuel filler flap
and tailgate
51, 78,
204
03
64
Right-hand drive.
03
``
Function Page
Hazard warning flashers 81
Ignition switch 71
Start/stop button 97
Cruise control 160, 161
Combined instrument
panel
65, 69
Horn, airbags 18, 77
Menu, audio and phone
control
120,
137, 191
Wipers and washing 87, 88
Headlamp control,
opener for fuel filler flap
and tailgate
51, 78,
204
Door handle -
Control panel 50, 55,
90, 92
Seat adjustment* 73
Bonnet opener 226
Parking brake 112
Function Page
Steering wheel adjust-
ment
77
Menus and messages,
direction indicators,
main/dipped beam, trip
computer
78,
81, 123,
155
Controls for active chas-
sis (Four-C)*
159
Gear selector 102
Climate control, ECC 128
Menu control and audio
system
120, 138
Information displays
Information displays.
The information displays show information on
some of the car's functions, e.g. cruise control,
trip computer and messages. The information
is shown with text and symbols.
There are further descriptions under the func-
tions that use the information displays.
03
66
Meters
Meters in the combined instrument panel.
Speedometer
Fuel gauge. See also Trip computer, page
155, and Refuelling, page 204.
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Indicator, information and warning
symbols
Indicator and warning symbols.
Main beam and direction indicator symbol
Indicator and information symbols
Indicator and warning symbols
1
Functionality check
All indicator and warning symbols illuminate in
key position II or when the engine is started.
When the engine has started, all the symbols
should go out except the parking brake sym-
bol, which only goes out when the brake is dis-
engaged.
If the engine does not start or if the functionality
check is carried out in key position II then all
symbols go out after 5 seconds except the
symbol for faults in the car's emissions system
and the symbol for low oil pressure.
Indicator and information symbols
Symbol Specification
ABL fault
Emissions system
ABS fault
Rear fog lamp on
Stability system
Engine preheater (diesel)
Low level in fuel tank
Information, read display text
Main beam On
1
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text. For information on checking the oil level, see page 227.
03
``
67
Left-hand direction indicators
Right-hand direction indicators
ABL fault
The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in
the ABL function (Active Bending Lights).
Emissions system
If the symbol illuminates then it may be due to
a fault in the car's emissions system. Drive to
a workshop for checking. Volvo recommends
that you seek assistance from an authorised
Volvo workshop.
ABS fault
If this symbol illuminates then the system is not
working. The car's regular brake system con-
tinues to work, but without the ABS function.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
2. Restart the engine.
3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to
a workshop to have the ABS system
checked. Volvo recommends that you
seek assistance from an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Rear fog lamp
This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp
is on.
Stability system
A flashing symbol indicates that the stability
system is operating. If the symbol illuminates
with constant glow then there is a fault in the
system.
Engine preheater (diesel)
This symbol illuminates during engine preheat-
ing. Preheating occurs when the temperature
is below 2 C. The car can be started once the
symbol goes out.
Low level in fuel tank
When the symbol illuminates the level in the
fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.
Information, read display text
When one of the car's systems does not
behave as intended, this information symbol
illuminates and a text appears on the informa-
tion display. The message text is cleared with
the READ button, see page 123, or it disap-
pears automatically after a time (time depend-
ing on which function is indicated). The infor-
mation symbol can also illuminate in conjunc-
tion with other symbols.
NOTE
When a service message is shown, the sym-
bol and message are cleared using the
READ button, or clear automatically after a
while.
Main beam On
The symbol illuminates when main beam is on
and with main beam flash
Left/right-hand direction indicators
Both direction indicator symbols flash when
the hazard warning flashers are used.
Indicator and warning symbols
Low oil pressure
A
Parking brake applied
Airbags SRS
Seatbelt reminder
Alternator not charging
03
68
Fault in brake system
Warning
A
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure
is not used. Warnings are made via display text, see pages
227 and 228.
Low oil pressure
If this symbol illuminates during driving then
the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the
engine immediately and check the engine oil
level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illumi-
nates and the oil level is normal, contact a
workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek
assistance from an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
Parking brake applied
This symbol illuminates with a constant glow
when the parking brake is applied. With the
electric parking brake, this symbol flashes
while it is being applied and then illuminates
with a constant glow.
A flashing symbol means that a fault has arisen.
Read the message on the information display.
NOTE
This symbol also illuminates when the
mechanical parking brake is only lightly
applied.
Airbags SRS
If this symbol remains illuminated or illuminates
while driving, it means a fault has been
detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or
IC systems. Drive immediately to a workshop
to have the system checked. Volvo recom-
mends that you seek assistance from an
Seatbelt reminder
This symbol illuminates if someone in a front
seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone
in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.
Alternator not charging
This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault
has occurred in the electrical system. Visit a
workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek
shop.
Fault in brake system
If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level
may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place
and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir,
see page 230.
If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at the
same time, there may be a fault in the brake
force distribution system.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
2. Restart the engine.
If both symbols extinguish, continue
driving.
If the symbols remain illuminated, check
the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see
page 230. If the brake fluid level is nor-
mal but the symbols are still illuminated,
the car can be driven, with great care, to
a workshop to have the brake system
checked. Volvo recommends that you
seek assistance from an authorised
Volvo workshop.
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid.
The loss of brake fluid must be investigated
by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you
contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
03
``
WARNING
If the brake and ABS symbols are illumi-
nated at the same time, there is a risk that
the rear end will skid during heavy braking.
Warning
The red warning symbol illuminates when a
fault has been indicated which could affect the
safety and/or driveability of the car. An explan-
atory text is shown on the information display
at the same time. The symbol remains visible
until the fault has been rectified but the text
message can be cleared with the READ but-
ton, see page 123. The warning symbol can
also illuminate in conjunction with other sym-
bols.
Action:
1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car
further.
2. Read the information on the information
display. Implement the action in accord-
ance with the message in the display. Clear
the message using the READ button.
Reminder doors not closed
If one of the doors, the bonnet
2
or tailgate is not
closed properly then the information or warn-
ing symbol illuminates together with an explan-
atory text message in the combined instrument
panel. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as
possible and close the door, bonnet or boot lid,
whichever is open.
If the car is driven at a speed lower than
approx. 7 km/h then the information
symbol illuminates.
If the car is driven at a speed higher
than approx. 7 km/h then the warning
symbol illuminates.
Trip meter
Trip meter and controls.
Display for trip meter
Controls for switching between trip meters
T1 and T2, as well as resetting the trip
meters.
The meters are used to measure short dis-
tances.
One short press on the control switches
between the two trip meters T1 and T2. A long
press (more than 2 seconds) resets an active
trip meter to zero. The distance is shown in the
display.
2
Only cars with alarm*.
03
70
Clock
Clock and setting knob.
Controls for setting the clock.
Information display for showing the time.
Turn the knob clockwise/anticlockwise to set
the time. The set time is shown in the informa-
tion display.
The clock can be temporarily replaced by a
symbol in conjunction with a message, see
page 123.
Key positions
03
``
Insert and remove the remote control
key
G
0
2
1
1
2
6
Ignition switch with inserted remote control key.
NOTE
For cars with keyless function*, see
page 48.
Insert the key
The remote control key, with its symbols cor-
rectly turned, is fitted in the ignition switch.
After a gentle press on the key it is drawn into
the lock.
IMPORTANT
Foreign objects in the ignition switch may
jeopardise the function or destroy the lock.
Do not press the remote control key incor-
rectly turned - Hold the end with the detach-
able key blade, see page 44.
Withdraw the key
The remote control key is ejected after a gentle
press on it. (Automatic gearbox* must be in
position P.)
Functions
The remote control key's 3 different key posi-
tions can be reached without the need to start
the engine. The table shows the functions
available in each key position.
NOTE
To reach key position I or II without starting
the engine - do not depress the brake/
clutch pedal when the following operations
are carried out.
Key position 0
Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch and gently press it - The key is drawn
into the lock.
Key position I
With the remote control key inserted into the
ignition switch - Briefly press on START/STOP
ENGINE.
Key position II
With the remote control key inserted into the
ignition switch - Press on START/STOP
ENGINE for about 2 seconds.
Back to key position 0
To return to key position 0 from position I or II
- Briefly press on START/STOP ENGINE.
Key positions
03
Posi-
tion
Function
0 Odometer, clock and tempera-
ture gauge are illuminated. The
steering lock is deactivated. The
audio system can be used.
I Sunroof*, power windows, 12 V
socket in the passenger compart-
ment, RTI*, phone*, ventilation
fan, ECC and windscreen wipers
can be used.
II The headlamps come on. Warn-
ing/indicator lamps illuminate for
5 seconds. All equipment oper-
ates apart from heated seats and
rear window defroster, which only
work when the engine is running.
For information on the audio system's func-
tions with remote control key removed, see
page 137.
Starting and stopping the engine
For information about starting/switching off the
engine, see page 97.
Towing
For important information about the remote
control key during towing, see page 221.
Seats
03
``
Front seats
Lumbar support adjustment, turn the
wheel
1
.
Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust
the distance to the steering wheel and ped-
als. Check that the seat is locked after
changing position.
Raise/lower* front edge of seat cushion,
pump up/down.
Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.
Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.
Control panel for power seat*.
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat
before setting off, never while driving.
Check that the seat is locked in position.
Lowering the front seat backrest*
The passenger seat backrest can be folded
forward to make room for long loads.
Move the seat as far back/down as possi-
ble.
Adjust the backrest to an upright position.
Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest
and fold it forward.
4. Push the seat forward so that the head
restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
WARNING
Check that the front seat backrest is prop-
erly engaged after it is raised.
Power seat*
Front edge of seat cushion up/down
Seat forward/backward and up/down
Backrest rake
The power front seats have overload protection
which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an
1
Also applies to power seat.
Seats
03
object. If this happens, go to key position I or
0 and wait a short time before adjusting the
seat again.
Only one movement (forward/back/up/down)
can be made at a time.
Preparations
The seats can be adjusted for a certain time
after unlocking the door with the remote con-
trol key without the key in the ignition switch.
Seat adjustment is normally made in key posi-
tion I and can always be made when the engine
is running.
Seat with memory function*
Store setting
Memory button
Memory button
Memory button
Button for storing settings
1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
2. Hold the button depressed to store set-
tings while depressing one of the memory
buttons.
Using a stored setting
Hold one of the memory buttons depressed
until the seat and the door mirrors stop. If you
release the button then the movement of the
seat will stop.
Key memory* in remote control key
2
The positions of the driver's seat and the door
mirrors are stored in the key memory when the
car is locked with the remote control key.
When the car is unlocked with the same remote
control key and the driver's door is opened the
driver's seat and also the door mirrors auto-
matically adopt the positions stored in the key
memory.
NOTE
The seat and the door mirrors do not move
if they are already set the relevant position.
It is also possible to use the key memory by
pressing the unlock button on the remote con-
trol key when the driver's door is open.
The key memory can be activated/deactivated
under Car Key memory Seat & mirror
2
For key memory for keyless drive, see page 48.
Seats
03
``
positions. For a description of the menu sys-
tem, see page 120.
NOTE
The key memory in the two remote control
keys and the seat's three memories are
completely independent of each other.
Emergency stop
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press
one of the buttons to stop the seat.
Restarting to reach the seat position stored in
the key memory is performed by pressing the
unlock button on the remote control key. The
driver's door must then be open.
WARNING
Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do
not play with the controls. Check that there
are no objects in front of, behind or under
the seat during adjustment. Ensure that
none of the backseat passengers will be
trapped.
Heated/ventilated seats*
For heated/ventilated seats, see page 129.
Rear seats
Head restraint, centre seat, rear
Adjust the head restraint according to passen-
ger height so that the whole of the back of the
head is covered if possible. Slide it up as
required.
To lower the head restraint again, the button
(located in the centre between the backrest
and head restraint, see illustration) must be
pressed in while the head restraint is pressed
down.
Manual lowering of the outer head
restraints, rear seat
G
0
1
8
7
6
0
Pull the locking handle closest to the head
restraint to fold the head restraint forward.
The head restraint is moved back manually
until a "click" can be heard.
Lowering the rear seat backrest
The triple-section rear seat backrest can be
folded in different ways in order to facilitate
loading long objects.
NOTE
The front seats may need to be pushed for-
wards, and/or the backrests adjusted
upwards, in order that the rear backrests
can be folded forward fully.
Seats
03
76
The left-hand backrest can be folded sep-
arately.
The centre backrest can be folded sepa-
rately.
The right-hand backrest can be folded
together with the centre backrest.
All backrests can be folded together.
G
0
1
7
9
0
3
If the centre backrest is being lowered -
fold and adjust the centre backrest's head
restraint downwards, see page 75.
The outer head restraints are lowered auto-
matically when the outer backrests are
lowered. Pull up the backrest's locking
handle while folding the backrest for-
ward at the same time. A red indicator on
the lock catch shows that the backrest
is no longer locked in place.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
NOTE
When the backrest has been raised, the red
indicator should no longer be showing. If it
is still showing then the backrest is not
locked in place.
WARNING
Check that the backrests and head
restraints in the rear seats are firmly locked
after raising.
Steering wheel
03
Adjusting
G
0
2
1
1
3
8
Adjusting the steering wheel.
Lever - releasing the steering wheel
Possible steering wheel positions
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both
height and depth:
1. Pull the lever towards you to release the
steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
that suits you.
3. Push back the lever to fix the steering
wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the
steering wheel lightly at the same time as
you push the lever back.
WARNING
Adjust and secure the steering wheel before
driving.
With speed related power steering* the level of
steering force can be adjusted, see
page 159.
Keypads*
Keypads in the steering wheel.
Cruise control, see page 160
Adaptive cruise control, see page 161
Audio and phone control, see page 137
Horn
Horn.
Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal.
Lighting
03
Light switches
G
0
2
1
1
4
1
Overview, light switches.
Thumbwheel for adjusting display and
instrument lighting
Rear fog lamp
Front fog lamps*
Light switches
Thumbwheel
1
for headlamp levelling
Instrument lighting
Different display and instrument lighting is
switched on depending on key position, see
page 71.
The display lighting is automatically subdued
in darkness - the sensitivity is set with the
thumbwheel.
The intensity of the instrument lighting is
adjusted with the thumbwheel.
Headlamp levelling
The load in the car changes the vertical align-
ment of the headlamp beam, which could daz-
zle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting
the height of the beam. Lower the beam if the
car is heavily laden.
1. Allow the engine to run or have the remote
control key in position I.
2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/
lower beam alignment.
Cars with Dual Xenon headlamps* have auto-
matic headlamp levelling and therefore do not
have the thumbwheel.
Main/dipped beam
G
0
2
1
1
4
2
Headlamp control and stalk switch.
Position for main beam flash
Position for main beam
Posi-
tion
Specification
Automatic*/deactivated dipped
beam. Only main beam flash.
Position/parking lamps
Automatic dipped beam. Main
beam and main beam flash
work in this position.
1
Not available for cars equipped with Dual Xenon headlamps*.
Lighting
03
``
NOTE
Main beam can only be activated in position
.
Main beam flash
Move the stalk switch gently towards the steer-
ing wheel to the position for main beam flash.
Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is
released.
Dipped beam
When the engine is started, dipped beam is
activated automatically* if the headlamp con-
trol is in position
2
. If necessary, auto-
matic dipped beam for this position can be
deactivated by a workshop. Volvo recom-
mends that you contact an authorised Volvo
workshop.
In position dipped beam is always acti-
vated automatically when the engine is running
or when the remote control key is in position
II.
Main beam
Main beam can only be activated when the
headlamp control is in position . Acti-
vate/deactivate main beam by moving the stalk
switch towards the steering wheel to the end
position and release.
When main beam has been activated the sym-
bol illuminates in the combined instru-
ment panel.
Active Bending Lights (ABL)*
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left)
and activated (right) respectively.
If the car is equipped with active headlamps
Active Bending Lights the light from the head-
lamps follows the steering wheel movement in
order to provide maximum lighting in bends
and junctions and so provide increased safety.
The function is activated automatically when
the car is started. In the event of a fault in the
function the symbol illuminates in the
combined instrument panel at the same time
as the information display shows an explana-
tory text and a further illuminated symbol.
Symbol Display Specifica-
tion
Headlamp
failure
Service
required
The system
is disen-
gaged. Visit
a workshop
if the mes-
sage
remains.
Volvo rec-
ommends
that you
contact an
authorised
Volvo work-
shop.
The function is only active in twilight or dark-
ness and only when the car is moving.
2
For certain markets dipped beam is deactivated in this position.
Lighting
03
The function
3
can be activated/deactivated
under Car settings Light settings
Active bending lights. For a description of the
menu system, see page 120.
For headlamp pattern adjustment, see
page 83.
G
0
2
1
1
4
4
Headlamp control in position for position/parking
lamps.
Turn the headlamp control to the centre posi-
tion (number plate lighting comes on at the
same time).
Rear position lamps also come on when the
tailgate is opened in order to alert anybody
behind.
Brake lights
The brake light automatically comes on during
braking.
Emergency brake lights and automatic
hazard warning flashers
Emergency brake lights (Adaptive Brake
Lights) are activated in the event of heavy brak-
ing or if the ABS brakes are activated. This
function means that the brake light flashes to
immediately alert cars travelling behind.
The system is activated if ABS is used for more
than 0.5 seconds or in the event of heavy brak-
ing, however, only when braking from speeds
above 50 km/h. When the speed of the car is
lower than 30 km/h the brake lights shine nor-
mally again and the hazard warning flashers
are switched on automatically. The hazard
warning flashers remain on until the car accel-
erates again but can be deactivated with the
button for hazard warning flashers.
Front fog lamps*
G
0
2
1
1
4
5
Button for front fog lamps.
The front fog lamps can be switched on along
with main/dipped beam or
position/parking lamps.
Press the button for on/off. The light in the but-
ton illuminates when the fog lamps are on.
NOTE
Regulations for using front fog lamps vary
between different countries.
3
Activated on delivery from the factory.
Lighting
03
``
81
Rear fog lamp
G
0
2
1
1
4
6
Button for rear fog lamp.
The rear fog lamp consists of one rear lamp and
can only be switched on in combination with
main/dipped beam or the front fog lamps.
Press the button for On/Off. The rear fog lamp
indicator symbol on the combined
instrument panel and the light in the button illu-
minate when the rear fog lamp is switched on.
The rear fog lamps are switched off automati-
cally when the engine is switched off.
NOTE
Regulations for using rear fog lamps vary
between different countries.
Hazard warning flashers
Button for hazard warning flashers.
Press the button to activate the hazard warning
flashers. Both direction indicator symbols in
the combined instrument panel flash when the
hazard warning flashers are in use.
The hazard warning flashers are activated
automatically when the car brakes so suddenly
that the emergency brake lights are activated
and speed is below 30 km/h. They remain on
when the car has stopped and are deactivated
automatically when the car is driven off again
or the button is depressed.
Direction indicators/flashers
G
0
2
1
1
4
8
Direction indicators/flashers.
Short flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the
first position and release. The direction
indicators flash three times. The function
can be activated/deactivated under Car
settings Light settings Turn
indicators, 3-flash
For a description of the menu system,
see page 120.
Continuous flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the
outer position.
The stalk switch remains in its position and is
moved back manually, or automatically by the
steering wheel movement.
Lighting
03
82
Direction indicator symbols
For direction indicator symbols, see page 66.
Interior lighting
G
0
2
1
1
4
9
Controls in roof console for the front reading
lamps and passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Reading lamp, right-hand side
Interior lighting
All lighting in the passenger compartment can
be switched on and off manually within
30 minutes from when:
the engine has been switched off and the
remote control key is in position 0
the car has been unlocked but the engine
has not been started.
Front roof lighting
The front reading lamps are switched on or off
by pressing the relevant button in the roof con-
sole.
Rear roof lighting
G
0
2
1
1
5
0
Rear roof lighting.
The lamps are switched on or off by pressing
each respective button.
Courtesy lighting
Courtesy lighting (and passenger compart-
ment lighting) is switched on and off respec-
tively when a side door is opened or closed.
Glovebox lighting
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off
respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
Vanity mirror
The lighting for the vanity mirror, see
page 190, is switched on and off respectively
when the cover is opened or closed.
Lighting, cargo area
The lighting in the cargo area is switched on
and off respectively when the tailgate is
opened or closed.
Automatic lighting
The switch for passenger compartment light-
ing has three positions for the lighting in the
passenger compartment:
Off right-hand side depressed, automatic
lighting deactivated.
Neutral position automatic lighting acti-
vated.
On left-hand side depressed, passenger
compartment lighting on.
Neutral position
When the button is in neutral position the pas-
senger compartment lighting is switched on
and off automatically in accordance with the
following.
The passenger compartment lighting is
switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:
Lighting
03
``
the car is unlocked with the remote control
key or key blade, see pages 41 or 44
the engine is switched off and the remote
control key is in position 0.
Passenger compartment lighting is switched
off when:
the engine is started
the car is locked.
The passenger compartment lighting comes
on and remains on for two minutes if one of the
doors is open.
If any lighting is switched on manually and the
car is locked then it will be switched off auto-
matically after two minutes.
Home safe light duration
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
switched on to work as home safe lighting after
the car has been locked.
1. Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch.
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward the
steering wheel to the end position and
release it. The function can be activated in
the same way as with main beam flash, see
page 78.
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
When the function is activated, dipped beam,
parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number
plate lighting, interior roof lamps and courtesy
lighting are switched on.
The length of time for which the home safe
lighting should be kept on can be set under Car
settings Light settings Home safe light
duration. For a description of the menu sys-
tem, see page 120.
Approach light duration*
Approach lighting is switched on with the
remote control key, see page 41, and is used
to switch on the car's lighting at a distance.
When the function is activated with the remote
control, parking lamps, door mirror lamps,
number plate lighting, interior roof lamps and
courtesy lighting are switched on.
The length of time for which the approach light-
ing should be kept on can be set under Car
settings Light settings Approach light
duration. For a description of the menu sys-
tem, see page 120.
Adjusting headlamp pattern
G
0
2
1
1
5
1
Headlamp pattern, left-hand traffic.
G
0
2
1
1
5
2
Headlamp pattern, right-hand traffic.
The headlamp pattern must be adjusted to
avoid dazzling oncoming motorists and can be
set for right or left-hand traffic. The correct pat-
tern will also better illuminate the verge.
Lighting
03
Dual Xenon and active Dual Xenon
headlamps*
G
0
1
9
4
4
2
Headlamp control for adjusting headlamp pattern.
Normal position the headlamp pattern is
correct for the country in which the car was
delivered.
Adapted position designed for opposite
headlamp pattern.
WARNING
The headlamps must be handled with
extreme care due to the Xenon lamp being
supplied from a high-voltage unit.
The country in which the car is delivered deter-
mines whether normal position is designed for
right or left-hand traffic.
Example 1
If a car that is delivered in Sweden shall be
driven in the UK then the headlamps must be
set to the adjusted position, see preceding
illustration.
Example 2
A car that is delivered in the UK is designed for
left-hand traffic and is driven there with the
headlamps in normal position, see preceding
illustration.
Halogen headlamps
The headlamp pattern for halogen headlamps
is readjusted by masking the headlamp lens.
The headlamp pattern may not be as good.
Masking the headlamps
1. Copy the A and B templates for left-hand
drive cars or the C and D templates for
right-hand drive cars with a scale of 1:2,
see page 86. Use a photocopier with a
zoom function for example:
A = LHD Right (left-hand drive, right
lens)
B = LHD Left (left-hand drive, left lens)
C = RHD Right (right-hand drive, right
lens)
D = RHD Left (right-hand drive, left lens)
2. Transfer the template to a self-adhesive
waterproof material and cut it out.
3. Start from the design line on the headlamp
lenses, see the dotted line on the side
85. Position the self-adhesive templates
at the right distance from each design line
using the illustration and the dimensions in
the following list:
A = LHD Right - approx. 86 mm
B = LHD Left - approx. 40 mm
C = RHD Right - 0 mm
D = RHD Left - approx. 96 mm
Lighting
03
``
85
Aligning the templates
G
0
3
3
9
5
4
Upper row: masking left-hand drive cars, templates A and B. Lower row: masking right-hand drive cars, templates C and D.
Lighting
03
86
Templates for halogen headlamps
G
0
2
1
1
5
5
Wipers and washing
03
``
Windscreen wipers
1
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers.
Rain sensor, on/off
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
Windscreen wipers off
Move the stalk switch to position 0 to
switch off the windscreen wipers.
Single sweep
Raise the stalk switch and release to
make one sweep.
Intermittent wiping
Set the number of sweeps per time
unit with the thumbwheel when inter-
mittent wiping is selected.
Continuous wiping
The wipers sweep at normal speed.
The wipers sweep at high speed.
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers during winter -
ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen
in and that any snow or ice on the wind-
screen (and rear window) is scraped away.
IMPORTANT
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
are cleaning the windscreen. The wind-
screen must be wet when the windscreen
wipers are operating.
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor automatically starts the wind-
screen wipers based on how much water it
detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of
the rain sensor can be adjusted using the
thumbwheel.
When the rain sensor is activated a light in the
button the rain sensor symbol is shown
in the right-hand display in the combined
instrument panel.
Activating and setting the sensitivity
When activating the rain sensor, the car must
be running or the remote control key in position
I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch
must be in position 0 or in the position for a
single sweep.
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button
. The windscreen wipers make one
sweep.
Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to make
an extra sweep.
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensi-
tivity and downward for lower sensitivity. (An
extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is
turned upward.)
Deactivating
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the but-
ton or move the stalk switch down to
another wiper program.
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated
when the key is removed from the ignition
switch or five minutes after the ignition has
been switched off.
1
Replacing the wiper blades (see page239) and filling the washer fluid (see page240).
Wipers and washing
03
IMPORTANT
The windscreen wipers could start and be
damaged in an automatic car wash. Deac-
tivate the rain sensor while the car is running
or the remote control key is in position I or
II. The symbol in the combined instrument
panel and the lamp in the button go out.
Washing the headlamps and windows
Washing function.
Washing the windscreen
Move the stalk switch toward the steering
wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp
washers.
The windscreen wipers will make several more
sweeps once the stalk switch has been
released. The headlamps are washed alter-
nately to prevent light intensity being reduced.
NOTE
One headlamp is washed at a time.
Heated washer nozzles*
The washer nozzles are heated automatically
in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid
freezing solid.
High-pressure headlamp washing*
High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a
large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the
headlamps are washed automatically at every
fifth windscreen wash cycle.
Wiper and washer, rear window
G
0
1
7
6
3
2
Rear window wiper intermittent wiping
Rear window wiper continuous speed
Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrow
in the illustration above) to initiate rear window
washing and wiping.
Wiper reversing
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen
wipers are on initiates intermittent rear window
wiping
2
. The function stops when reverse gear
is disengaged.
If the rear window wiper is already on at con-
tinuous speed, no change is made.
2
This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Wipers and washing
03
89
NOTE
On cars with rain sensor, the rear window
wiper is activated with reversing, if the sen-
sor is activated and it is raining.
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
03
General
Laminated glass
The glass is reinforced which pro-
vides better protection against
break-ins and improved sound insu-
lation in the passenger compartment.
The windscreen and other windows* have lami-
nated glass.
Water and dirt-repellent coating*
Windows are treated with a coating
that improves the view in difficult
weather conditions. Maintenance, see
page 266.
IMPORTANT
Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice
from the windows. Use the heating to
remove ice from the door mirrors.
Heat-reflecting windscreen*
Areas where IR film is not applied.
The windscreen is equipped with a heat-
reflecting film (IR) that reduces the solar heat
radiation into the passenger compartment.
The positioning of electronic equipment, such
as a transponder, behind a glass surface with
heat-reflecting film may affect its function and
performance.
For the optimal function of electronic equip-
ment, it should be positioned on the part of the
windscreen with no heat-reflecting film (see the
highlighted area in the previous illustration).
Power windows
G
0
1
8
5
1
6
Driver's door control panel.
Switch for electric child safety locks* and
disengaging rear power window buttons,
see page 55.
Rear window controls
Front window controls
WARNING
Check that none of the rear seat passengers
is in danger of becoming trapped in any way
when closing the windows from the driver's
door.
03
``
91
WARNING
Make sure that children or other passengers
are not in danger of becoming trapped in
any way when closing the windows, in par-
ticular when the remote control key is used.
WARNING
If there are children in the car, remember to
always switch off the power supply to the
power windows by removing the remote
control key if the driver leaves the car.
Operating
G
0
1
8
5
1
7
Operating the power windows.
Operating without auto
Operating with auto
All power windows can be operated using the
control panel in the driver's door. Each control
panel in the other doors can only control its
own respective power window. The power win-
dows can only be controlled with one control
panel at a time.
In order that the power windows can be used
the remote control key must be in position I or
II. After the car has been running the power
windows can be operated for several minutes
even when the remote control key has been
removed, but not however after the door has
been opened.
Closing of the windows is stopped and the
window is opened if anything prevents its
movement. It is possible to force the pinch pro-
tection when closing has been interrupted, e.g.
with ice, by continuously holding the button up
until the window is closed. The pinch protec-
tion is reactivated after a brief pause.
NOTE
One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise
when the rear windows are open is to also
open the front windows slightly.
Operating without auto
Move one of the controls up/down gently. The
power windows move up/down as long as the
control is held in position.
Operating with auto
Move one of the controls up/down to the end
position and release it. The window runs auto-
matically to its end position.
Remote control and central locking
buttons
All side windows can be opened/closed auto-
matically with the remote control key or the
central locking buttons:
Press and hold the lock button until the
windows start to open/close. To interrupt
opening/closing, press the lock button
again.
Resetting
If the battery is disconnected then the function
for automatic opening must be reset so that it
can work correctly.
1. Gently raise the front section of the button
to raise the window to its end position and
hold it there for one second.
2. Release the button briefly.
3. Raise the front section of the button again
for one second.
WARNING
Resetting must be carried out to ensure that
pinch protection works.
03
Door mirrors
G
0
1
8
5
1
8
Door mirror controls.
Adjusting
1. Press the L button for the left-hand door
mirror or the R button for the right-hand
door mirror. The light in the button illumi-
nates.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
centre.
3. Press the L or R button again. The light
should no longer be illuminated.
WARNING
The mirrors are the wide angle type for opti-
mum surveillance. Objects may appear fur-
ther away than they actually are.
Retractable power door mirrors*
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving
in narrow spaces:
1. Press down the L and R buttons at the
same time.
2. Release them after
approximately 1 second. The mirrors auto-
matically stop in the fully retracted posi-
tion.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L
and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors
automatically stop in the fully extended posi-
tion.
Storing the position*
The mirror positions are stored in the key mem-
ory when the car has been locked with the
remote control key. When the car is unlocked
with the same remote control key the mirrors
and the driver's seat adopt the stored positions
when the driver's door is opened.
under Car Key memory Seat & mirror
positions. For a description of the menu sys-
tem, see page 120.
Angling the door mirror when parking
1
The door mirror can be angled down for the
driver to view the side of the road when parking
for example.
Engage reverse gear and press the L or R
button.
When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
automatically returns to its original position
after about 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing
the button labelled L or R respectively
Automatic retraction when locking
When the car is locked/unlocked with the
remote control key the door mirrors are auto-
matically retracted/extended.
under Car settings Side mirror settings
Fold mirr. when locking. For a description
of the menu system, see page 120.
Resetting to neutral
Mirrors that have been moved out of position
by an external force must be reset electrically
to the neutral position for electric retracting/
extending to work correctly:
1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R but-
tons.
1
Only in combination with power seat with memory, see page 73.
03
2. Fold them out again with the L and R but-
tons.
3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
Home safe and approach lighting
The light on the door mirrors illuminates when
approach lighting or home safe lighting is
selected, see page 83.
Rear window and door mirror
defrosters
Use the defroster to quickly remove misting
and ice from the rear window and the door mir-
rors.
Press the button once to start simultaneous
rear window and door mirror defrosting. The
light in the button indicates that the function is
active. Defrosting is deactivated automatically
and its duration is controlled by the outside
temperature.
The rear window is demisted/defrosted auto-
matically if the car is started in an outside tem-
perature lower than +9 C.
Automatic defrosting can be selected under
Climate settings Auto. rear defroster.
Select between On or Off. For a description of
the menu system, see page 120.
Interior rearview mirror
G
0
2
1
3
4
2
Control for dimming
Manual dimming
Bright light from behind could be reflected in
the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use
dimming with the dimming control when lights
from behind are distracting:
1. Use dimming by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment.
2. Return to normal position by moving the
control towards the windscreen.
Automatic dimming*
Bright light from behind is automatically
dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control is
not available in mirrors with automatic dim-
ming.
The compass* can only be specified for rear-
view mirrors with automatic dimming, see
page 94.
Compass*
03
Operation
G
0
2
9
7
3
7
Rearview mirror with compass.
The bottom centre of the rearview mirror has
an integrated display that shows the compass
direction in which the front of the car is point-
ing. Eight different directions are shown with
English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north
east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW
(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).
The compass is activated automatically when
the car is started or in key position II, see
page 71. To deactivate/activate the compass -
press in the button on the rear side of the mirror
using a paper clip for example.
Calibration
The compass may need calibrating to work
correctly. C is shown in the mirror's display if
the compass needs calibrating.
1. Stop the car in a large open area free from
steel structures and high-voltage power
lines.
2. Start the car.
NOTE
For optimum calibration - switch off all elec-
trical equipment (climate control system,
wipers etc.) and make sure that all doors are
closed.
3. Press and hold the button on the rear of the
rearview mirror (use a paper clip or similar)
until C is shown again (approx. 6 seconds).
4. Drive off as usual. C disappears from the
display when calibration is complete.
Alternative calibration method: Drive
slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than
8 km/h until C disappears from the display
when calibration is complete.
Selecting the zone
G
0
3
0
2
9
5
Magnetic zones.
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The correct zone must be selected for the com-
pass to work correctly.
1. The remote control key should be in posi-
tion II, see page 71.
2. Press and hold the button on the rear of the
rearview mirror (use a paper clip or similar)
for at least 3 seconds. The number for the
current area is shown.
3. Press the button repeatedly until the num-
ber for the required geographic area
(115) is shown.
4. The display will revert to showing the com-
pass direction after a few seconds.
Power sunroof*
03
``
General
The sunroof controls are located in the roof
panel. The sunroof can be opened vertically at
the rear edge and horizontally. Key position I or
II is required for the sunroof to be opened.
Horizontal opening
G
0
1
7
8
2
3
Horizontal opening, backward/forward.
Opening, automatic
Opening, manual
Closing, manual
Closing, automatic
Opening
For maximum sunroof opening, move the con-
trol back to the position for automatic opening
and release.
Open manually by pulling the control back-
wards to the point of resistance for manual
opening. The sunroof moves to maximum open
position as long as the button is kept
depressed.
Closing
Close manually by pushing the control for-
wards to the point of resistance for manual
closing. The sunroof moves to closed position
as long as the button is kept depressed.
WARNING
Risk of crushing when sunroof is closed.
The sunroof's pinch-protection function
only operates during automatic closing, not
manual.
Close automatically by pressing the control to
the position for automatic closing and then
release it.
The power supply to the sunroof is switched off
by removing the remote control key from the
ignition switch.
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Remember to always switch off the power
supply to the sunroof by removing the
remote control key if the driver leaves the
car.
Vertical opening
G
0
2
8
9
0
0
Vertical opening, raised at the rear edge.
Open by pressing the rear edge of the con-
trol upward.
Close by pulling the rear edge of the con-
trol down.
Power sunroof*
03
Closing using the remote control key or
central locking button
G
0
2
1
3
4
5
One long press on the lock button closes the
sunroof and all the windows, see pages 41 and
50. The doors and the tailgate are locked. To
interrupt closing, press the lock button again.
WARNING
If the sunroof is closed using the remote
control key, check that no one is in danger
of becoming trapped in any way.
Sunscreen
The sunroof features a manual, sliding interior
sunscreen. The sunscreen slides back auto-
matically when the sunroof is opened. Grip the
handle and slide the screen forward to close it.
Pinch protection
The sunroof's pinch protection function is trig-
gered if it is blocked by an object during auto-
matic closing. If blocked, the sunroof will stop
and automatically open to the previous posi-
tion.
Starting the engine
03
``
97
Petrol and diesel engines
G
0
2
1
1
2
6
Ignition switch with inserted remote control key
and START/STOP ENGINE button.
IMPORTANT
Do not press in the remote control key incor-
rectly turned - Hold the end with the detach-
able key blade, see page 44.
1. Fit the remote control key in the ignition
switch - Gently press the key until it is
drawn into the lock.
2. Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed
1
. (For
cars with automatic gearbox - Depress the
brake pedal.)
3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button
and then release it.
NOTE
A certain delay may occur for cars with the
2.0D diesel engine before engine starting
begins during this time the display shows
Engine preheating.
The starter motor works until the engine has
started, but for no longer than 10 seconds (die-
sel up to 60 seconds).
If the engine has not started after 10 seconds
- try again by holding in the START/STOP
ENGINE button until the engine starts.
WARNING
Always remove the remote control key from
the ignition switch when leaving the car -
especially if there are children in the car.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
the ignition switch while driving or when the
car is being towed. The steering lock could
be activated which would mean that the car
cannot be steered.
Never remove the remote control key with
the Keyless drive* function from the car
while driving or during towing.
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
than normal for certain engine types during
cold starting. This is so that the emissions
system can reach normal operating tem-
perature as quickly as possible, which min-
imises exhaust emissions and protects the
environment.
Keyless drive
Follow steps 2-3 to start a petrol engine. For
more information on Keyless drive, see
page 48.
NOTE
One precondition for starting the car is that
one of the car's remote control keys with the
keyless drive* function is located inside the
passenger compartment or the cargo area.
1
If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the car.
Starting the engine
03
98
Stop the engine
To switch off the engine - Press START/STOP
ENGINE.
If the car has an automatic gearbox and the
gear selector is not in a position P or if the car
is moving - Press twice or hold the button
depressed until the engine stops.
Steering lock
2
The steering lock is deactivated when the
remote control key is inserted into the ignition
switch and is activated when the key is
removed from the lock.
Activate the steering lock when leaving the car
to reduce the risk of car theft.
Key positions
For information on the remote control key's dif-
ferent key positions, see page 71
2
For cars with Keyless drive* the steering lock is deactivated when the START/STOP ENGINE button is pressed in for the first time. The steering lock is activated when the engine is switched off
and the driver's door is opened.
Starting the engine Flexifuel
03
``
General information about starting
with Flexifuel
The engine is started in the same way as in a
petrol-engined car.
In the event of starting difficulties
If the engine does not start at the first start
attempt:
Make further attempts to start with the
START/STOP ENGINE button.
If the engine still does not start
The outside temperature is lower than +5 C:
1. Connect the engine block heater for at
least 1 hour.
2. Make further attempts to start with the
START/STOP ENGINE button.
IMPORTANT
If the engine does not start despite repeated
start attempts, you are recommended to
contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Engine block heater*
Electrical input to the engine block heater.
When the temperature is expected to be lower
than 10 C and the car has been refuelled with
bioethanol E85, an engine block heater should
be used for about 2 hours to facilitate the quick
starting of the engine.
The lower the temperature, the longer the time
required with the engine block heater. At
-20 C the heater should be used for approx. 3
hours.
Cars intended for E85 have an electric engine
block heater*. Starting and driving with a pre-
heated engine involves significantly lower
emissions and reduced fuel consumption. For
this reason you should aim to use the engine
block heater throughout the winter months.
WARNING
The engine block heater is powered by high
voltage. Fault tracing and repair of an elec-
tric engine block heater and its electrical
connections must only be carried out by a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
NOTE
Points to remember for carrying reserve
fuel:
In the event of stalling due to an empty fuel
tank, bioethanol E85 from a reserve fuel can
may make the engine difficult to start in
extreme cold. This is avoided by filling the
reserve fuel can with 95 octane petrol.
For more information on Flexifuel's bioethanol
E 85 fuel, see page 206 and 286.
Starting the engine Flexifuel
03
100
Fuel adaptation
If the fuel tank is filled with petrol after the car
has been driven on bioethanol E85 (or vice
versa) then the engine may run slightly
unevenly for a time. For this reason it is impor-
tant to allow the engine to accustom itself
(adapt) to the new fuel mixture.
Adaptation takes place automatically when the
car is driven for a short period at an even
speed.
IMPORTANT
After the fuel mixture in the tank has been
changed an adaptation should be made by
driving at an even speed for about 15
minutes.
If the battery has been discharged or discon-
nected then a slightly longer period of driving
is required for the adaptation as the memory
for the electronics has been cleared.
Starting the engine external battery
03
101
Jump starting
If the battery is flat then the car can be started
with current from another battery.
The following points are recommended when
using a donor battery in order to avoid the risk
of an explosion:
1. Insert the remote control key in key posi-
tion 0, see page 71.
2. Ensure that the donor battery is 12 volt.
3. If the donor battery is in another car, switch
off the donor car's engine in the other car
and ensure that the cars do not touch one
another.
4. Connect the red jump lead to the positive
terminal on the donor battery .
5. Open the clips on the front cover of the
battery in your car and remove the cover,
see page 242.
6. Connect the red jump lead to the battery's
positive terminal .
7. Connect one clamp from the black jump
lead to the donor battery's negative termi-
nal .
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.
8. Connect the other clamp to an earthing
point, (right-hand engine mounting at the
top, the outer screw head) . Check that
the jump lead clamps are fixed securely so
that there are no sparks during the starting
procedure.
9. Start the engine of the "donor car". Let the
engine run a few minutes at a speed slightly
higher than idle (1500 rpm).
10. Start the engine of the car with the flat bat-
tery. Do not touch the crocodile clips dur-
ing the start procedure. There is a risk of
sparks forming.
11. Remove the jump leads, first the black and
then the red.
Make sure that none of the clamps on the
black jump lead comes into contact with
the battery's positive terminal or the clamp
connected to the red jump lead.
WARNING
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas,
which is highly explosive. One spark, which
can be generated if you connect a jump lead
incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery
explode. The battery contains sulphuric
acid, which can cause serious burns. If the
acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or
clothing, flush with large quantities of water.
If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical
attention immediately.
Gearboxes
03
102
Manual - five-speed
G
0
2
1
3
4
8
Depress the clutch pedal fully during each
gear change.
Take your foot off the clutch pedal between
gear changes.
Follow the shifting pattern indicated.
For the best possible fuel economy, use the
highest gear possible as often as possible.
Reverse gear inhibitor - five-speed
G
0
2
1
3
4
9
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil-
ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse
gear during normal forward travel.
Only engage reverse gear when the car is sta-
tionary.
To engage reverse gear, the gear lever
must first be put in position N. Reverse
gear cannot therefore be engaged directly
from fifth gear due to the reverse gear
inhibitor.
Manual - six-speed
G
0
2
1
3
4
8
Depress the clutch pedal fully during each
gear change.
Take your foot off the clutch pedal between
gear changes.
Follow the shifting pattern indicated.
For the best possible fuel economy, use the
highest gear possible as often as possible.
Gearboxes
03
``
103
Reverse gear inhibitor - six-speed
G
0
2
1
3
4
9
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil-
ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse
gear during normal forward travel.
Only engage reverse gear when the car is sta-
tionary.
Automatic gearbox, Geartronic
G
0
2
1
3
5
0
The information display shows the position of
the gear selector using the following indica-
tions: P, R, N, D, S, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, see
page 65.
Gear positions
Parking position (P)
Select P when starting the engine or when the
car is parked. The brake pedal must be
depressed to disengage the gear selector from
the P position.
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the
P position is engaged. Activate the electric
parking brake by pressing the button, see
page 112.
IMPORTANT
The car must be stationary when position
P is selected.
Reverse (R)
The car must be stationary when position R is
selected.
Neutral position (N)
No gear is engaged and the engine can be
started. Apply the parking brake if the car is
stationary with the gear selector in position N.
Drive (D)
D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and
down takes place automatically based on the
level of acceleration and speed. The car must
be stationary when the gear selector is moved
to position D from position R.
Geartronic manual gear positions (M)
The driver can also change gear manually
using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The
car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal
is released.
Manual gearshift mode is obtained by moving
the lever from position D to the right-hand end
position at M. The information display shifts the
indication from D to one of the figures "1-6",
depending on which gear is engaged just then,
see page 65.
Gearboxes
03
104
Move the lever forwards towards + (plus) to
change up a gear and release the lever, which
returns to its rest position at M.
Pull the lever back towards (minus) to change
down a gear and release the lever.
The manual gearshift mode M can be selected
at any time while driving.
Geartronic automatically shifts down if the
driver allows the speed to decrease lower than
a level suitable for the selected gear, in order
to avoid jerking and stalling.
To return to automatic driving mode: move the
lever to the left-hand end position at D.
NOTE
If the gearbox has a Sport programme then
the gearbox will only become manual after
the lever has been moved forwards or back-
wards in its M position. The information dis-
play then shifts the indication from S to
show which of the gears 16 is engaged.
Geartronic - Sport mode (S)
1
The Sport programme provides sportier cha-
racteristics and allows higher engine speed for
the gears. At the same time it responds more
quickly to acceleration. During active driving,
the use of a lower gear is prioritised, leading to
a delayed upshift.
Sport mode is obtained by moving the lever
from D position to the end position at M. The
information display shifts the indication from
D to S.
Sport mode can be selected at any time while
driving.
Geartronic - Winter mode
It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads
if 3rd gear is engaged manually.
1. Depress the brake pedal and move the
gear lever from the D position to the end
position at M - the instrument panel display
shifts the indication from D to the figure 1.
2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever
forward towards + (plus) twice - the display
shifts the indication from 1 to 3.
3. Release the brake and accelerate carefully.
The gearbox "winter mode" means that the car
moves off with a lower engine speed and
reduced engine power on the drive wheels.
Kick-down
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
way to the floor (beyond the position normally
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is
immediately engaged. This is known as kick-
down.
If the accelerator is released from the kick-
down position, the gearbox automatically
changes up.
Kick-down is used when maximum accelera-
tion is needed, such as for overtaking.
Safety function
To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox
control program has a protective downshift
inhibitor which prevents the kick-down func-
tion.
Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kick-
down which would result in an engine speed
high enough to damage the engine. Nothing
happens if the driver still tries to shift down in
this way at high engine speed the original
gear remains engaged.
When kick-down is activated the car can
change one or more gears at a time depending
on engine speed. The car changes up when the
engine reaches its maximum speed in order to
prevent damage to the engine.
1
Only on the T6 model.
Gearboxes
03
``
105
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
G
0
2
1
3
5
1
The gear selector can be moved forward and
back freely between N and D. Other positions
are locked with a latch that is released with the
inhibitor button on the gear selector.
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever
can be moved forwards or backwards between
P, R, N and D.
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
The automatic gearbox has special safety sys-
tems:
Keylock
To remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch, the gear selector must be in the
P position. The remote control key is locked in
all other positions.
Parking position (P)
Stationary car with engine running:
Keep your foot on the brake pedal when mov-
ing the gear selector to another position.
Electric gear inhibitor Shiftlock Parking
position (P)
To be able to move the gear selector from P to
other gear positions, the brake pedal must be
depressed and the remote control key in posi-
tion II activated, see page 71.
Shiftlock Neutral (N)
If the gear selector is in the N position and the
car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds
(irrespective of whether the engine is running)
then the gear selector is locked.
To be able to move the gear selector from N to
other gear positions, the brake pedal must be
depressed and the remote control key must be
in position II, see page 71.
Deactivating the automatic gear selector
inhibitor
If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat
battery, the gear selector must be moved from
the P position so that the car can be moved.
Lift the rubber mat in the compartment
behind the centre console and open the
hatch.
Fully insert the key blade. Press the key
blade down and hold (For information on
the key blade, see page 44.)
Move the gear selector from the P position.
Gearboxes
03
106
Text message and action
In some situations the display may show a
message at the same time as a symbol is illu-
minated.
Symbol Display Driving characteristics Action
Transm. overheat brake to hold Difficulty in maintaining even speed at con-
stant engine speed.
Transmission overheated. Keep the car
stationary using the foot brake.
A
Transm. overheat park safely Significant pulling in the car's traction. Transmission overheated. Park the car
immediately in a safe manner.
A
Transm. cooling let engine run No drive due to overheated gearbox. Transmission overheated. For fastest cool-
ing: Run the engine at idling speed with the
gear lever in the N or P position until the
message clears.
A
For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.
The table shows three steps with an increased
degree of seriousness should the transmission
become too hot. In parallel with the display text
the driver is also advised that the car's elec-
tronics are temporarily changing the driving
characteristics. Follow the instructions on the
information display where appropriate.
NOTE
The table's examples are no indication that
the car is defective but instead show that a
safety function has been activated inten-
tionally to prevent damage to one of the
car's components.
For more possible display messages with their
respective proposals for solutions concerning
automatic transmission, see page 123.
A display text clears automatically after the
action has been carried out or after one press
on the indicator stalk READ button.
All-wheel drive AWD*
03
All Wheel Drive is always engaged
All Wheel Drive means that the car is driving all
four wheels at the same time.
The power is automatically distributed
between the front and rear wheels. An elec-
tronically controlled clutch system distributes
the power to the wheels that have the best grip
on the current road surface. This provides the
best traction and prevents wheel spin. Under
normal driving conditions, the majority of
power is transmitted to the front wheels.
All Wheel Drive improves driving safety in rain,
snow and icy conditions.
Foot brake
03
108
General
The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If
one brake circuit is damaged then this will
mean that the brakes engage at a deeper level
and harder pressure on the pedal is needed to
produce the normal braking effect.
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted
by a brake servo.
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the engine
is running.
If the brake is used when the engine is switched
off then the pedal will feel stiff and more force
must be used to brake the car.
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy
load the brakes can be relieved by using engine
braking. Engine braking is most efficiently used
if the same gear is used downhill as up.
For more general information on heavy loads
on the car, see page 280.
Anti-lock braking system
The car is equipped with ABS (Anti-lock
Braking System) which prevents the wheels
from locking during braking. This means the
ability to steer is maintained and it is easier to
swerve to avoid a hazard for example. Vibration
may be felt in the brake pedal when this is
engaged and this is normal.
A short test of the ABS system is made auto-
matically after the engine has been started
when the driver releases the brake pedal. A
further automatic test of the ABS system may
be made when the car reaches 40 km/h. The
test may be experienced as pulses in the brake
pedal.
Cleaning the brake discs
Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs
may result in delayed brake function. This delay
is minimised by cleaning the brake linings.
Manual cleaning is advisable with wet road sur-
faces, prior to long-stay parking and after the
car has been washed. Carry this out by braking
gently during a short period while en route.
Emergency Brake Assistance
Emergency Brake Assistance EBA (Emergency
Brake Assistance) helps to increase brake
force and so reduce braking distance. The EBA
system detects the driver's braking style and
increases brake force as necessary. The brake
force can be reinforced up to the level when the
ABS system is engaged. The EBA function is
interrupted when the pressure on the brake
pedal is reduced.
NOTE
When EBA is activated the brake pedal low-
ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold)
the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the
brake pedal is released then all braking
ceases.
Symbols in the combined instrument
panel
Constant glow Check the
brake fluid level. If the level is
low, fill with brake fluid and
check for the cause of the brake
fluid loss.
Constant glow for 2 seconds
when the engine is started
There was a fault in the brake
system's ABS function when
the engine was last running.
Foot brake
03
109
WARNING
If and illuminate at the same
time, there may be a fault in the brake sys-
tem.
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is nor-
mal at this stage, drive carefully to the near-
est workshop and have the brake system
checked - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must
be investigated.
Hill Descent Control (HDC)
03
110
General
1
HDC can be compared to an automatic engine
brake. When you release the accelerator on
downhill gradients the car is normally braked
by means of the engine striving for low engine
idling speeds, so-called engine braking. But
the steeper the road and the more load there is
in the car, the faster the car rolls despite engine
braking. In order to then reduce speed the
driver has to assist using the footbrake.
The function makes it possible to increase/
reduce speed on steep downhill gradients, with
a foot only on the accelerator pedal, without
using the footbrake. The sensitivity of the
accelerator pedal decreases and becomes
more precise by means of the full actuation of
the pedal being restricted to adjusting engine
speed within a limited range. The brake system
brakes itself and provides the car with a low
and even speed, so allowing the driver to fully
focus on steering.
HDC is particularly helpful on steep gradients
with an uneven road surface and slippery sec-
tions. E.g. when launching a boat on a trailer
from a ramp.
WARNING
HDC does not work in all situations, but is
instead only intended to be supplementary
assistance.
The driver always has ultimate responsibility
that the car is driven safely.
Function
HDC is engaged or disengaged using a switch
on the centre console. An indicator lamp in the
button illuminates when the function is
switched on. When HDC is operating the
symbol illuminates and the display
shows Hill descent control ON.
The function only operates in first gear position
and in reverse gear. For an automatic gearbox,
gear position 1 must be selected, which is
shown with the figure 1 in the trip computer
display, see page 103.
NOTE
HDC cannot be activated in an automatic
gearbox with the gear selector in position
D.
Operation
HDC allows the car to roll at a maximum of
10 km/h forwards with engine braking and
7 km/h backwards. However, any speed within
the gear's speed register can be selected using
the accelerator pedal. When the accelerator
pedal is released, the car is braked quickly to
10 or 7 km/h respectively, irrespective of the
hill's gradient and without the need for the foot-
brake.
The brake lights come on automatically when
the function is operating. The driver can brake
or stop the car at any time by using the foot-
brake.
HDC is deactivated:
1
HDC is only available on the XC70.
Hill Descent Control (HDC)
03
111
with the on/off button on the centre con-
sole
if a gear higher than 1 is selected on a
manual gearbox
if a gear higher than 1 is selected on an
automatic gearbox, or if the gear selector
is moved to position D.
The function can be disengaged at any time. If
it takes place on a steep downhill gradient then
the braking effect will not release directly, but
slowly instead.
NOTE
With HDC activated you may experience a
delay between acceleration pedal activation
and engine response.
Parking brake
03
112
Parking brake, electric
An electric parking brake has the same appli-
cations as a manual parking brake, e.g. when
starting uphill.
Function
A faint electric motor noise can be heard when
the parking brake is being applied. The noise
can also be heard during the automatic func-
tion checking of the parking brake.
If the car is stationary when the parking brake
is applied then it only acts on the rear wheels.
If it is applied when the car is moving then the
normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts
on all four wheels. Brake function changes over
to the rear wheels when the car is almost sta-
tionary.
Low battery voltage
If the battery voltage is too low then the parking
brake can neither be released nor applied.
Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage
is too low, see page 101.
How to apply the parking brake
G
0
2
1
3
5
4
Parking brake control.
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
2. Press the control.
3. Release the foot brake pedal and make
sure that the car is at a standstill position.
When parking the vehicle, always engage
1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the
gear selector in position P (for automatic
gearbox).
The symbol in the combined instrument
panel flashes until the parking brake is fully
applied. When the symbol illuminates the park-
ing brake is applied.
In an emergency the parking brake can be
applied when the vehicle is moving by depress-
ing the control. When the control is released or
the accelerator pedal is depressed the braking
is interrupted.
NOTE
In the event of emergency braking at speeds
above 10 km/h a signal sounds during the
braking procedure.
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked facing uphill; turn the wheels
away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill, turn the
wheels towards the kerb.
How to release the parking brake
G
0
2
1
3
5
9
Parking brake control.
Parking brake
03
``
113
Cars with manual gearbox
Releasing manually
switch.
2. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
3. Pull the control.
NOTE
The parking brake can also be released
manually by depressing the clutch pedal
instead of the brake pedal. Volvo recom-
mends the use of the brake pedal.
Releasing automatically
1. Start the engine.
2. Ease up the clutch and depress the accel-
erator.
IMPORTANT
It is possible to release the parking brake
automatically, even when the gear lever is in
neutral position, if the engine is running.
Cars with automatic gearbox
Releasing manually
1. Put the seatbelt on.
switch.
3. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
4. Pull the control.
Releasing automatically
1. Put the seatbelt on.
2. Start the engine.
3. Move the gear selector to position D or R
and depress the accelerator.
NOTE
For safety reasons, the parking brake is only
released automatically if the engine is run-
ning and the driver is wearing a seatbelt. The
parking brake is released immediately on
cars with automatic gearbox when the
accelerator pedal is depressed and the gear
selector is in position D or R.
Heavy load uphill
A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the
car to roll backward when the parking brake is
released automatically on a steep incline.
Avoid this by depressing the control while driv-
ing off. Release the control when the engine
achieves traction.
Cars with Keyless drive function
Release manually by pressing the
START/STOP ENGINE button, then depress
the brake or clutch pedal and pull the control.
Symbols
Read the message on the infor-
mation display
A flashing symbol indicates that
the parking brake is applied. If
the symbol flashes in any other
situation then this means that a
fault has arisen. Read the mes-
sage on the information display.
Messages
G
0
1
6
1
6
6
Parking brake
03
114
Park brake not fully released - A fault is pre-
venting the parking brake from being released.
Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo work-
shop is recommended. A warning signal
sounds if you pull away with this error mes-
sage.
Parking brake not applied - A fault is pre-
venting the parking brake from being applied.
Try to apply and release. Visit a workshop if the
message remains - a Volvo workshop is rec-
ommended.
The message is also illuminated on cars with
manual gearbox when the car is driven at low
speed with the door open in order to alert the
driver that the parking brake may have been
unintentionally disengaged.
Parking brake Service required - A fault has
arisen. Visit a workshop if the fault persists - a
Volvo workshop is recommended.
If the car has to be parked before the fault has
been rectified then the wheels must be turned
as if parking on a hill and 1st gear engaged
(manual gearbox) or the gear selector must be
in position P (automatic gearbox).
Replacing the brake linings
The rear brake linings must be replaced at a
workshop due to the design of the electric
parking brake - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
HomeLink
*
03
``
General
HomeLink
is a programmable remote control

which can control up to three different devices
(e.g. garage door, alarm system, outdoor light-
ing and indoor lighting etc.) and in doing so
replace their remote controls. HomeLink is
supplied built into the left-hand sun visor.
The HomeLink
panel consists of three pro-

grammable buttons and one indicator lamp.
NOTE
HomeLink is designed to be inoperable if
the car is locked from the outside.
Save the original remote controls for future
programming (e.g. for purchasing a new
car).
Erase the programming for the buttons
when selling the car.
Metallic sun visors should not be used in
cars equipped with HomeLink. This could
have a negative effect on the HomeLink
function.
Operation
When HomeLink
is fully programmed it can be

used in place of the separate original remote
controls.
Depress the programmed button to activate
the garage door, alarm system etc. The indi-
cator lamp illuminates for the time that the but-
ton is kept depressed.
NOTE
In the event that the ignition is not activated,
HomeLink operates for 30 minutes after the
driver's door has been opened.
The original remote controls can of course be
used in parallel with HomeLink
.
WARNING
If HomeLink
is used to operate a garage

door or gate, ensure that nobody is in the
vicinity of the door or gate while it is in
motion.
Do not use the HomeLink
remote control
for any garage door that does not have
safety stop and safety reverse. The garage
door must react immediately when it
detects that something is preventing its
movement, and stop directly and reverse. A
garage door without these characteristics
could cause personal injury. For further
information - contact the supplier via the
Internet: www.homelink.com.
Programming for the first time
The first step erases the memory in
HomeLink
and must not be carried out when

only one individual button is being reprogram-
med.
1. Depress the two outer buttons and do not
release until the indicator lamp starts to
flash after approx. 20 seconds. The flash-
ing indicates that HomeLink
is set in
"learn mode" and is ready to be pro-
grammed.
HomeLink
*
03
2. Position the original remote control
5-30 cm from HomeLink
. Monitor the indi-

cator lamp.
The particular distance that is required
between the original remote control and
HomeLink
depends on the programming

of the device in question. Perhaps several
attempts will be required at different dis-
tances. Maintain each position for approx.
15 seconds before trying a new one.
3. Depress the button for the original remote
control and the button to be programmed
on HomeLink
simultaneously. Do not
release the buttons until the indicator lamp
has changed over from slow to rapid flash-
ing. The rapid flashing indicates successful
programming.
4. Test the programming by depressing the
programmed button on HomeLink
and
watching the indicator lamp:
Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu-
minates with a constant glow when the
button is kept depressed, this indicates
that the programming is complete. The
garage door, gate or similar should now
be activated when the programmed
HomeLink
button is depressed.
Glow not constant: The indicator lamp
flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds
and then changes over to a constant
glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc-
ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds
and indicates that the device has a "roll-
ing code". The garage door, gate or sim-
ilar is not activated when the pro-
grammed HomeLink
button is
depressed. Continue the programming
in accordance with the following.
5. Locate the "programming button
1
" on the
receiver for the garage door for example,
normally located close to the antenna's
bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi-
culty in finding the button - consult the
supplier's manual, or contact the supplier
via the Internet: www.homelink.com.
6. Depress and release the "programming
button". The button flashes for
approx. 30 seconds and the next step must
be carried out within this period.
7. Depress the programmed button on
HomeLink
, while the "programming but-

ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for
approx. 3 seconds and then release.
Repeat the press/hold/release sequence
up to 3 times to conclude the program-
ming.
Programming individual buttons
To reprogram an individual button, proceed in
accordance with the following:
1. Depress the required button on
HomeLink
and do not release until step 3

has been completed.
2. When the indicator lamp on HomeLink
starts to flash, after approx. 20 seconds,

position the original remote control
5-30 cm from HomeLink
. Monitor the indi-

cator lamp.
The particular distance that is required
between the original remote control and
HomeLink depends on the programming of
the device in question. Perhaps several
attempts will be required at different dis-
tances. Maintain each position for approx.
15 seconds before trying a new one.
3. Depress the button on the original remote
control. The indicator lamp will start to
flash. When the flashing has changed over
from a slow to a rapid flashing - release
both buttons. The rapid flashing indicates
successful programming.
4. Test the programming by depressing the
programmed button on HomeLink and
watching the indicator lamp:
1
Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
HomeLink
*
03
Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu-
minates with a constant glow when the
button is kept depressed, this indicates
that the programming is complete. The
garage door, gate or similar should now
be activated when the programmed
HomeLink
button is depressed.
Glow not constant: The indicator lamp
flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds
and then changes over to a constant
glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc-
ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds
and indicates that the device has a "roll-
ing code". The garage door, gate or sim-
ilar is not activated when the pro-
grammed HomeLink
button is
depressed. Continue the programming
in accordance with the following.
5. Locate the "programming button
2
" on the
receiver for the garage door for example,
normally located close to the antenna's
bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi-
culty in finding the button - consult the
supplier's manual, or contact the supplier
via the Internet: www.homelink.com.
6. Depress and release the "programming
button". The button flashes for approx. 30
seconds and the next step must be carried
out within this period.
7. Depress the programmed button on
HomeLink
, while the "programming but-

ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for
approx. 3 seconds and then release.
Repeat the press/hold/release sequence
up to 3 times to conclude the program-
ming.
Erasing programming
It is only possible to erase the programming for
all the buttons on HomeLink, not for individual
buttons.
Depress the two outer buttons and do not
release until the indicator lamp starts to
flash after approx. 20 seconds.
> HomeLink
is now set in so-called

"learn mode" and is ready to be pro-
grammed once more, see page 115.
2
Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
G
0
2
0
9
0
8
Menus and messages........................................................................... 120
Climate control...................................................................................... 126
Fuel-driven engine block heater
and passenger compartment heater*................................................... 133
Fuel-driven additional heater*............................................................... 136
Audio system........................................................................................ 137
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen* ....................... 150
Trip computer........................................................................................ 155
DSTC Stability and traction control system....................................... 157
Adapting driving characteristics........................................................... 159
Cruise control*...................................................................................... 160
Adaptive cruise control*........................................................................ 161
Distance Alert........................................................................................ 167
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*...................................................... 170
Driver Alert System DAC*................................................................... 175
Driver Alert System - LDW*................................................................... 178
Park assist syst*.................................................................................... 181
BLIS* Blind Spot Information System................................................ 184
Comfort inside the passenger compartment........................................ 188
Bluetooth handsfree*............................................................................ 191
Built-in phone*...................................................................................... 196
04
COMFORT AND DRI VI NG PLEASURE
Menus and messages
04
Centre console
Some functions are controlled from the centre
console via the menu system or via the keypad
in the steering wheel. Each function is descri-
bed under its respective section.
The current menu level is shown at the top right
of the centre console's display.
Centre console controls
Centre console with information display and con-
trols for menus.
Numerical keypad 19
Navigation button scrolls and selects
among menu options
MENU leads to the menu system
EXIT leads back one step in the menu
structure. A long press leads out from the
menu system.
ENTER selects menu options
Steering wheel keypad*
ENTER
EXIT
Navigation buttons up/down.
If the steering wheel keypad has ENTER and
EXIT then these buttons, and the navigation
buttons, have the same functions as the con-
trols in the centre console.
Search paths
Access to some functions is provided directly
via the function buttons and some are reached
via the menu system.
The search paths to the menu system's func-
tions are stated in the form: Car settings
Lock settings, which presupposes that fol-
lowing is carried out before:
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to the required menu, e.g. Car
settings, using the navigation buttons and
press ENTER.
3. Scroll to the required submenu, e.g. Lock
settings, and press ENTER.
The navigation buttons can be used instead of
ENTER and EXIT when navigating in the menu
hierarchy. The right-hand arrow is equal to
ENTER and the left-hand arrow to EXIT.
The menu options are numbered and can also
be selected directly with the numerical keypad
(only 19).
Menu overview
The phone and audio sources each have sep-
arate main menus. An audio source main menu
(e.g. CD) can only be accessed when that par-
ticular audio source is active, see page 138.
Menus and messages
04
``
The following menu options are included in
Main menu:
Car Key memory
Seat & mirror positions*
Car settings
Information
Light settings
Lock settings
Reduced guard
1
Tyre pressure*
Side mirror settings*
Collision warning settings*
Parking camera settings*
Lane departure warning*
Steering force level*
Unit settings
Driver Alert on
Climate settings
Automatic blower adjust
Recirculation timer
Auto. rear defroster
Reset climate settings
Main menu AM
Audio settings
Sound stage
Equalizer front
Equalizer rear
Auto. volume control
Reset all audio settings
Main menu FM
FM settings
News
TP (Traffic information)
Radio text
PTY (Program type)
Advanced radio settings
Audio settings
2
Main menu DAB*
3
Main menu CD
Random
Off
Folder
4
Disc
4
Single disc
5
All discs
5
CD settings
Track information*
News
Audio settings
2
Main menu AUX
AUX input volume
Audio settings
2
Main menu USB
USB settings
News
1
Available in certain models.
2
For submenus, see "Main menu AM/Audio settings".
3
See page 147.
4
Only in systems that allow the playback of MP3 and WMA format audio files.
5
Only in systems with CD changer.
Menus and messages
04
Audio settings
2
Track information
Main menu iPod
iPod settings
News
Audio settings
2
Track information
Main menu, Bluetooth
Last 10 missed calls
Last 10 received calls
Last 10 dialled calls
Phone book
Search
Copy fr. mobile phone
Bluetooth*
Connect phone
Change phone
Remove phone
Car Bluetooth info
Phone settings
Call options
Sounds and volume
Synchronise phone book
Main menu, built-in phone
Call register
Last 10 missed calls
Last 10 received calls
Last 10 dialled calls
Erase list
Call duration
Phone book
New contact
Search
Copy all
Erase SIM
Erase phone
Memory status
Speed-dial
Messages
Read
Write new
Message settings
Erase message
Call options
Send my number
Call waiting
Automatic answer
Auto redial
Voice mail number
Diversions
Phone settings
Network selection
SIM security
Edit PIN code
Sounds and volume
IDIS
Reset Phone settings
2
For submenus, see "Main menu AM/Audio settings".
Menus and messages
04
``
Combined instrument panel
G
0
2
1
3
6
4
Information display and controls for menus.
READ access to message list and mes-
sage confirmation.
Thumbwheel browse between menu
options.
RESET reset the active function. Used in
certain cases to select/activate a function,
see the explanation under each respective
function.
The menus shown on the information displays
in the combined instrument panel are con-
trolled with the left-hand stalk switch. The
menus shown depend on key position, see
page 71. If a message appears then this must
be acknowledged with READ for the menus to
be shown.
Menu overview
6
To empty fuel tank
Average
Instantaneous
Average speed
Lane departure warning
Tyre pressure Calibration*
Current speed
Park heat timer 1/2
7
Park vent timer 1/2
Park timer mode
Direct start Park heat
Direct start Park el.heat
Direct start Park vent
Additional heat auto
Rest heat start
DSTC
Message
Text message in the information display.
When a warning, information or indicator sym-
bol illuminates, a corresponding message
appears on the information display. An error
message is stored in a memory list until the
fault is rectified.
Press READ to acknowledge and browse
between the messages.
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you are
using the trip computer, the message must
be read (press READ) before the previous
activity can be resumed.
6
Certain menu options*.
7
Can only be set when the engine is switched off.
Menus and messages
04
124
Stop safely Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage. Volvo recom-
mends that you contact
an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Stop engine Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage. Volvo recom-
an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Service urgent Volvo recommends that
you engage an author-
ised Volvo workshop to
check the car immedi-
ately.
Service
required
Volvo recommends that
check the car as soon
as possible.
See manual Read the owner's man-
ual.
Book time for
maintenance
Time to book regular
service. Volvo recom-
an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Time for regular
maintenance
Time for regular service.
you contact an author-
The timing is deter-
mined by the number of
kilometres driven, num-
ber of months since the
last service, engine run-
ning time and oil grade.
Maintenance
overdue
If the service intervals
are not followed then
the warranty does not
cover any damaged
parts. Volvo recom-
an authorised Volvo
workshop for service.
Transmission
oil Change nee-
ded
check the car as soon
as possible.
Transmission
performance
low
Transmission cannot
handle full capacity.
Drive with care until the
message clears
A
.
If shown repeatedly:
you contact an author-
Transmission
hot Reduce
speed
Drive more smoothly or
stop the car in a safe
manner. Disengage the
gear and run the engine
at idling speed until the
message clears
A
.
Transmission
hot Stop safely
Critical fault. Stop the
car immediately in a
safe manner. Volvo rec-
ommends that you con-
tact an authorised
Volvo workshop.
A
.
Menus and messages
04
125
Temporarily
OFF
A function has been
temporarily switched
off and is reset auto-
matically while driving
or after starting again.
Power save
mode
The audio system is
switched off to save
energy. Charge the bat-
tery.
A
For more messages concerning automatic transmission, see
page 105.
Climate control
04
General
Air conditioning
The car is equipped with Electronic Climate
Control (ECC). The climate control system
cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in
the passenger compartment.
NOTE
The air conditioning can be switched off, but
to ensure the best possible climate comfort
in the passenger compartment and to pre-
vent the windows from misting, it should
always be on.
Actual temperature
The temperature you select corresponds to the
physical experience with reference to factors
such as air speed, humidity and solar radia-
tion* in and around the car.
The system includes a sun sensor* which
detects on which side the sun is shining into
the passenger compartment. This means that
the temperature can differ between the right
and left-hand air vents despite the controls
being set for the same temperature on both
sides.
Sensor location
The sun sensor* is located on the top side
of the dashboard.
The temperature sensor for the passenger
compartment is located below the climate
control panel.
The outside temperature sensor is located
on the door mirror.
The humidity sensor* is located in the inte-
rior rearview mirror.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with
clothing or other objects.
Side windows and sunroof
To ensure that the air conditioning works opti-
mally, the side windows, and sunroof if appro-
priate, should be closed.
Misting windows
Remove misting on the insides of the windows
by primarily using the defroster function.
To reduce the risk of misting, keep the win-
dows clean and use window cleaner.
Temporary shut-off of the air
conditioning
When the engine requires full power, e.g. for full
acceleration or driving uphill with a trailer, the
air conditioning can be temporarily switched
off. There may then be a temporary increase in
temperature in the passenger compartment.
Condensation
In warm weather, condensation from the air
conditioning may drip under the car. This is
normal.
Ice and snow
Remove ice and snow from the climate control
system air intake (the grille between the bonnet
and the windscreen).
Fault tracing and repair
Engage a workshop that has authorisation for
the fault tracing and repair of the climate con-
trol system. Volvo recommends that you con-
tact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Refrigerant
The climate control system contains R134a
refrigerant, see page 283. This refrigerant con-
tains no chlorine, which means that it is harm-
less to the ozone layer. Engage a workshop
that has authorisation for filling/changing
refrigerant to carry out the work. Volvo recom-
workshop.
Total airing function
The function opens/closes all side windows
simultaneously and can be used for example to
Climate control
04
``
quickly air the car during hot weather, see
page 50.
Passenger compartment filter
All air entering the car's passenger compart-
ment is cleaned with a filter. This must be
replaced at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo
Service Programme for the recommended
replacement intervals. If the car is used in a
severely contaminated environment, it may be
necessary to replace the filter more often.
NOTE
There are different types of passenger com-
partment filter. Make sure that the correct
filter is fitted.
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*
This option keeps the passenger compartment
clear of allergy and asthma inducing sub-
stances. For more information on CZIP, see the
brochure included with the purchase of the car.
The following is included:
An enhanced fan function that means that
the fan starts when the car is opened with
the remote control key. The fan fills the
passenger compartment with fresh air. The
function starts when required and is dis-
engaged automatically after a time or when
one of the passenger compartment doors
is opened. The amount of time the fan runs
is reduced gradually due to reduced need
up until the car is 4 years old.
The air quality system IAQS is a fully auto-
matic system that cleans the air in the pas-
senger compartment from contaminants
such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous
oxides and ground-level ozone.
NOTE
In cars with CZIP the IAQS filter should be
changed after 15 000 km or once per year
depending on whichever occurs first. How-
ever, up to 75 000 km over 5 years. In cars
without CZIP the IAQS filter must be
changed at the normal service.
Use of tested materials in the interior
equipment.
The materials have been developed in order to
minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger
compartment and they contribute to making
the passenger compartment easier to keep
clean. The carpets in both the passenger com-
partment and the cargo area are removable
and easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning
agents and car care products recommended
by Volvo, see page 266.
Menu settings
It is possible to change the default settings for
three of the climate control system's functions
via the centre console, see page 120:
Fan speed in automatic mode*, see
page 130.
Recirculation timer for passenger com-
partment air, see page 131.
Automatic rear window defrosting, see
page 93.
All climate control system functions are set to
original position with RESET via the display.
Air distribution
G
0
1
7
6
9
9
The incoming air is divided between
20 different vents in the passenger compart-
ment.
Climate control
04
Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO
mode*.
If necessary it can be controlled manually, see
page 132.
Air vents in the dashboard
G
0
2
1
3
6
7
Open
Closed
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow
Aim the outer vents at the side windows to
remove misting.
A certain air flow always comes from the vents
in order to maintain a good climate in the pas-
senger compartment.
Air vents in the door pillars
G
0
2
1
3
6
8
Closed
Open
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow
Aim the vents at the windows to remove mist-
ing.
Aim the vents into the passenger compartment
to maintain a comfortable climate in the rear
seat.
NOTE
Remember that small children may be sen-
sitive to air flows and draughts.
Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC
Ventilated front seats*, left-hand side
Fan
Heated front seats, left-hand side
Air distribution
Heated front seats, right-hand side
AUTO
Ventilated front seats*, right-hand side
Temperature control, right-hand side
AC ON/OFF Air conditioning On/Off
Rear window and door mirror defrosters,
see page 93
Climate control
04
``
Max. defroster
Recirculation/Air quality system
Temperature control, left-hand side
Operation
Ventilated front seats*
Ventilated front seats can only
be specified when ECC is
installed in the car. The venti-
lation system consists of fans
in the seats and backrests
that draw air through the seat
upholstery. The cooling effect
increases the cooler the passenger compart-
ment air becomes.
The ventilation is regulated from the climate
control and takes seat temperature, solar radi-
ation and outside temperature into considera-
tion.
The ventilation can be used at the same time
as seat heating. For example, the function can
be used to dry damp from clothing.
The ventilation system can be activated when
the engine is running. There are three comfort
levels that produce different cooling and dehu-
midification outputs:
Comfort level III: press the button once for
maximum output three lamps illuminate.
Comfort level II: press the button twice for
lower output two lamps illuminate.
Comfort level I: press the button three
times for the lowest output one lamp illu-
minates.
Press the button four times to switch off the
function no lamps illuminate.
NOTE
The seat ventilation should be used carefully
by people sensitive to draughts. Comfort
level one is recommended for long-term
use.
IMPORTANT
The seat ventilation cannot be started when
passenger compartment temperature is
below 5 C. This is to avoid chilling anyone
sitting in the seat.
Fan
Turn the knob to increase or
decrease fan speed. If AUTO
is selected then fan speed is
regulated automatically. The
previously set fan speed is
disengaged.
NOTE
If the fan is fully disengaged the air condi-
tioning is not engaged which may result in a
risk of misting windows.
Heated seats
Front seats
Press the button once for the
highest heat level three
lamps illuminate.
Press the button twice for a
lower heat level two lamps
illuminate.
Press the button three times for the lowest heat
level one lamp illuminates.
Press the button four times to switch off the
heat no lamps illuminate.
WARNING
The heated seat should not be used by peo-
ple who find it difficult to perceive tempera-
ture increase because of sensory loss or for
any reason have difficulty in managing to
use the control of the heated seat. Other-
wise, burn injuries may arise.
Climate control
04
130
Air distribution
The figure consists of three
buttons. When the buttons
are pressed a lamp in front of
the respective part of the fig-
ure illuminates and shows
which air distribution is
selected, see page 132.
Auto
The Auto function automati-
cally regulates temperature,
air conditioning, fan speed,
recirculation, and air distribu-
tion.
If you select one or more manual functions, the
other functions continue to be controlled auto-
matically. The air quality sensor is engaged and
all manual settings are switched off when
AUTO is pressed. The display shows AUTO
CLIMATE.
Fan speed in automatic mode can be set up
under the menu: Climate settings
Automatic blower adjust. Choose between
Low, Normal or High:
Low - Automatic fan control. Low airflow
is prioritised.
Normal - Automatic fan control.
High - Automatic fan control. A more
intense airflow is prioritised.
page 120.
Temperature control
The temperatures on the
driver and passenger sides
can be set independently.
When the car is started, the
most recent setting is
resumed.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
selecting a higher/lower temperature than
the actual temperature required.
AC Air conditioning on/off
ON: The air conditioning is
controlled by the system's
Auto function. This way,
incoming air is cooled and
dehumidified.
OFF: When the defroster
function is activated the air conditioning is
switched on automatically (can be switched off
using the AC button).
Defroster
Used to quickly remove mist-
ing and ice from the wind-
screen and side windows. Air
flowing to the windows. The
light in the defroster button
illuminates when the function
is active.
The following also takes place in order to pro-
vide maximum dehumidification in the passen-
ger compartment:
the air conditioning is automatically
engaged
recirculation and the air quality system are
automatically disengaged.
The air conditioning can be disengaged man-
ually using the AC button. When the defroster
function is switched off the climate control sys-
tem returns to the previous settings.
Climate control
04
``
Recirculation/Air quality system
Recirculation
When recirculation is
engaged the right-hand
orange light in the button illu-
minates. The function is
selected to shut out bad air,
exhaust gases etc. from the
passenger compartment. The
air in the passenger compartment is recircula-
ted, i.e. no outside air is taken into the car when
this function is activated.
NOTE
If the air in the car recirculates for too long,
there is a risk of misting on the insides of the
windows.
Timer
With the timer function activated the system
will exit manually activated recirculation mode
according to a time that depends on the out-
side temperature. This reduces the risk of ice,
misting and bad air. Activate/deactivate the
function under Climate settings
Recirculation timer. For a description of the
menu system, see page 120.
NOTE
When Defroster is selected, recirculation is
always deactivated.
Air quality system*
The air quality system sepa-
rates gases and particles to
reduce the levels of odours
and pollution in the passenger
compartment. If the outside
air is contaminated then the
air intake is closed and the air
is recirculated. When the AUTO button is
depressed the air quality sensor is always
engaged.
Activating recirculation/air quality
sensor
Switch between the three
functions by pressing the but-
ton repeatedly.
The left-hand orange lamp illuminates the
air quality sensor is disengaged. There is
no recirculation, only fresh air.
The centre green lamp illuminates recir-
culation not engaged, providing it is not
required for cooling in hot weather.
The right-hand orange lamp illuminates
recirculation is engaged.
NOTE
The air quality sensor should always be
engaged in order to obtain the best air in the
passenger compartment.
Recirculation is limited in cold weather to
avoid misting.
If the insides of the windows start misting
up, disengage the air quality sensor, and the
defroster functions for the windscreen, the
side and the rear windows should also be
used to demist the windows.
Activating recirculation
Switch between recirculation
On/Off by pressing the button
repeatedly. The lamp illumi-
nates when recirculation is
engaged.
Climate control
04
132
Air distribution table
Air distribution Use Air distribution Use
Air to windows. Some air
flows from the air vents.
The air is not recirculated.
Air conditioning is always
engaged.
to remove ice and misting
quickly.
Air to the floor and win-
dows. Some air flows
from the dashboard air
vents.
to ensure comfortable
conditions and good
demisting in cold or
humid weather.
Air to windscreen and
side windows. Some air
flows from the air vents.
to prevent misting and
icing in a cold and humid
climate, (not at too low fan
speed to enable this).
Air to floor and from dash-
board air vents.
in sunny weather with
cool outside tempera-
tures.
Airflow to windows and
from dashboard air vents.
to ensure good comfort in
warm, dry weather.
Air to floor. Some air flows
to the dashboard air vents
and windows.
to direct heat or cold to
the floor
Airflow to the head and
chest from the dashboard
air vents.
to ensure efficient cooling
in warm weather.
Airflow to windows, from
dashboard air vents and
to the floor.
to provide cooler air along
the floor or warmer air
higher up in cold weather
or hot, dry weather.
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
04
``
Fuel-driven heater
General information about the parking
heater
The parking heater heats the engine and pas-
senger compartment and can be started
directly or with the timer.
Two different times can be selected using the
timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car
is heated and ready. The car's electronic sys-
tem calculates when heating should be started
based on the outside temperature.
The heater cannot start if the outside tempera-
ture exceeds 15 C. At 10 C or lower the
maximum running time of the parking heater is
50 minutes.
WARNING
The car must be outdoors when the parking
heater is used.
NOTE
When the parking heater is active there may
be smoke from the right-hand wheel hous-
ing, which is perfectly normal.
Refuelling
WARNING!
AVERTISSEMENT!
ACHTUNG!
G
0
2
1
3
9
5
Warning label on fuel filler flap.
WARNING
Fuel which spills out can be ignited. Switch
off the fuel-driven heater before starting to
refuel.
Check the information display to see that
the parking heater is switched off. When it
is running, the information display shows
Park heat ON.
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of
the car should point downhill to ensure that
there is a supply of fuel to the parking heater.
Battery and fuel
If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel
level is too low, the parking heater will be
switched off automatically and a message
appears on the information display. Acknowl-
edge the message by pressing the indicator
stalk READ button once, see page 134.
IMPORTANT
Repeated use of the parking heater com-
bined with short journeys may discharge the
battery and impair starting.
The car should be driven for the same time
as the heater is used to ensure that the car's
battery is recharged adequately to replace
the energy consumed by the heater when it
is used on a regular basis.
04
Operation
G
0
2
1
3
6
4
READ button
Thumbwheel
RESET button
For more information on the information dis-
play and READ, see page 123.
Symbols and display messages
When one of the timer's settings or
Direct start is activated, the infor-
mation symbol in the combined instrument
panel illuminates while the information display
shows an explanatory text and a further illumi-
nated symbol. The table shows symbols and
display texts that appear.
Sym-
bol
Display Specification
G
0
2
5
1
0
2
Fuel
heater
ON
The heater is
switched on and
running.
G
0
2
5
1
0
2
Timer is
set for
Fuel
heater
The heater will
start at the set time
after the car has
been left, when the
remote control key
is removed from
the ignition switch.
G
0
2
5
1
0
2
Heater
stopped
Low bat-
tery
The heater has
been stopped by
the car's electron-
ics in order to facil-
itate starting the
engine.
Sym-
bol
Display Specification
G
0
2
5
1
0
2
Heater
unavail.
Low fuel
level
Setting the heater
is not possible due
to fuel level being
too low
(approx. 7 litres).
G
0
2
5
1
0
2
Park
heater
Service
required
Heater not work-
ing. Contact a
workshop for
repair. Volvo rec-
ommends that you
contact an author-
ised Volvo work-
shop.
A display text clears automatically after a time
or after one press on the indicator stalk
READ button.
Direct start and immediate stop
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Direct start
Park heat.
2. Press RESET to select between ON and
OFF.
ON: Parking heater switched on manually or
with programmed timer.
04
OFF: Parking heater switched off.
Following the direct start of the heater it will be
activated for 50 minutes.
Heating of the passenger compartment will
begin as soon as the engine coolant has
reached the correct temperature.
NOTE
The car can be started and driven while the
parking heater is running.
Setting the timer
The time when the car shall be used and heated
is specified with the timer.
Select between TIMER 1 and TIMER 2.
NOTE
The timer can only be programmed when
the remote control key is in key position I,
see page 71.
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Park heat
timer 1.
2. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash-
ing hours setting.
3. Select the required hour using the thumb-
wheel.
4. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash-
ing minutes setting.
5. Select the required minute using the
thumbwheel.
6. Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting.
7. Press RESET to activate the timer.
After setting Park heat timer 1 a second start
time can be programmed with Park heat timer
2 by scrolling to it with the thumbwheel.
Set the alternative time in the same way as
Park heat timer 1.
Deactivating a timer-started heater
A timer-started heater can be switched off
manually before the set time has elapsed. Pro-
ceed as follows:
1. Press READ.
2. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the text
Park heat timer 1 or 2.
> The text ON flashes on the display.
3. Press RESET.
> The text OFF is shown with a constant
glow and the heater is switched OFF.
A timer-started heater can be switched off in
accordance with the instructions in the section
"Direct start and immediate stop", see
page 134.
Clock/timer
The heater's time is connected to the car's
clock.
NOTE
All timer programming will be cleared if the
car's clock is reset.
Fuel-driven additional heater*
04
Additional heater (diesel)
G
0
2
1
3
6
4
READ button
Thumbwheel
RESET button
In diesel-engined cars the additional heater
may be required for achieving the correct tem-
perature in the engine and passenger com-
partment during cold weather.
The heater starts automatically when extra
heat is required when the engine is running.
The heater is switched off automatically when
the correct temperature is reached or when the
engine is switched off.
NOTE
When the additional heater is active there
may be smoke from the right-hand wheel
housing which is perfectly normal.
Auto mode or shutdown
The additional heater can be switched off for
short distances if required.
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional
heat auto.
2. Press RESET to select between ON and
OFF.
Passenger compartment heater*
If the additional heater is supplemented with
timer function then it will be a fuel-driven pas-
senger compartment heater, see page 133.
Audio system
04
``
General
The audio system can be equipped with differ-
ent options and is one of the following three
basic versions:
Performance
High Performance
Premium Sound
The system version is shown in the display
when the audio system is started.
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II and the Dolby
symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
Surround Pro Logic II System is manufactured
under license from Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
Remote control key and key positions
The audio system can be used without the
remote control key in the ignition switch for
15 minutes at a time.
NOTE
Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch if the audio system is used
when the engine is switched off. This is to
avoid discharging the battery unnecessar-
ily.
If the audio system is active when the engine is
switched off then it is activated automatically
next time the engine is started.
Overview
Input for external audio source; AUX and
USB* (e.g. iPod
1
)
Steering wheel keypad
Centre console control panel
Control panel with headphones socket*
Steering wheel keypad*
Confirm selection in menu system, accept
phone call.
Lead up in menu system. Interrupt current
function, end/refuse phone calls, clear
entered characters.
Volume
A short press scrolls between CD tracks or
preset radio stations. A long press fast-
winds CD tracks or seeks the next availa-
ble radio station.
1
The iPod trademark belongs to Apple Computer Inc.
Audio system
04
Rear control panel with headphones
socket
Headphones with an impedance of
16-32 ohm and sensitivity of 102 dB or higher
are recommended for best sound reproduc-
tion.
VOLUME Volume, left and right.
Scroll/search forward and backward.
MODE - Select between AM, FM, CD,
AUX, USB*(e.g. iPod), DAB1/DAB2* and
On/Off. For connection via AUX or USB,
see page 140.
Headphones sockets (3.5 mm).
The control panel is activated with MODE.
Deactivation is possible via a long press on
MODE or when the engine is switched off.
Scroll/search forward and backward
Short presses on (2) are used to scroll between
CD tracks or preset radio stations. A long press
fast-winds CD tracks or seeks the next availa-
ble radio station.
Limitations
The audio source (FM, AM, CD etc.) played
back in the speakers cannot be controlled
from the rear control panel.
Audio functions
Centre console, controls for audio functions.
AM, FM and CD, internal audio sources
MODE - Scroll between external audio
sources (AUX, USB* and DAB1/DAB2*).
For connection via AUX or USB, see
page 140
SOUND - Pushbutton and knob controls
for adjusting the sound pattern
Navigation button
VOLUME - Volume and On/Off
Audio volume and automatic volume
control
The audio system compensates for disrupting
noises in the passenger compartment by
increasing the volume with the speed of the
Audio system
04
``
car. The level of compensation can be set at
low, medium or high. Select the level under
Audio settings Auto. volume control.
External audio source audio volume
The AUX input can be used for connecting an
MP3 player which has no USB connection for
example, see page 140.
NOTE
The audio quality may be impaired if the
player is charged while the audio system is
in AUX mode. In which case, avoid charging
the player via the 12 V socket.
1. Set the audio system in AUX mode using
the MODE button, press MENU and navi-
gate with (4) to AUX input volume, see
page 137.
2. Turn the SOUND control or press /
the navigation button, see page 137.
Audio controls
Press the control SOUND repeatedly to
browse among the following listed options.
Adjustment is made by turning the control.
NOTE
Press MENU to access the audio settings.
Bass - Bass level.
Treble - Treble level.
Fader Balance between the front and
rear speakers.
Balance Balance between the left and
right-hand speakers.
Subwoofer* - Bass speaker level. Turning
the control anticlockwise to MIN deac-
tivates the Subwoofer. The Subwoofer is
located as illustrated below.
G
0
1
9
4
1
9
Subwoofer location.
Surround* Surround settings.
Under Surround 3 channel stereo or Dolby
Surround Pro Logic II can be activated by
selecting 3-ch or Dpl2 respectively. This ena-
bles the following options:
Centre level* Level for centre speaker.
Surround levelSurround level* Level
for surround.
Equalizer
The equalizer
2
can be used to adjust different
frequency bands separately.
1. Go to Audio settings and select
Equalizer front or Equalizer rear.
The sound level for the wavelength is
adjusted with / on the navigation
button. Press / to select another
wavelength.
2. Use ENTER to save or EXIT to close.
Sound stage
The sound experience can be optimised for the
driver's seat*, both front seats or the rear seat.
Select one of the options under
Audio settings Sound stage.
2
Certain audio levels.
Audio system
04
Optimum sound reproduction
The audio system is calibrated for optimum
sound reproduction by means of digital signal
processing.
This calibration takes into account loudspeak-
ers, amplifiers, passenger compartment
acoustics, listener position etc. for each com-
bination of car model and audio system.
There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes
into account the position of the volume control,
radio reception and vehicle speed.
The controls explained in these operating
instructions, e.g. Bass, Treble and
Equalizer, are only intended for the user to be
able to adapt the sound reproduction accord-
ing to personal taste.
AUX, USB and iPod
General
An iPod or MP3 player can be connected to the
car's infotainment system via the USB connec-
tion* or AUX input in the centre console.
The AUX input enables the connection of an
external audio source, e.g. an iPod or MP3
player. Read more on page 139
If you choose to connect an iPod, MP3 player
or a USB memory stick to the USB connec-
tion* then you can control the audio source
using the car's audio controls.
Select the connection using the MODE button:
1. If USB is selected then Connect device is
shown in the display.
2. Connect your iPod, MP3 player or USB
memory stick to the USB connection* in
the centre console's storage compartment
(see preceding illustration).
The text Loading is shown in the display when
the system is loading the storage media's file
structure. This may take some time.
Once loading is complete, track information is
shown on the display and the desired track can
be selected.
A track can be selected in three ways:
With the TUNING control, see page 137.
the navigation control's (4) right or left-
hand button or, see page 137.
the steering wheel keypad (see page 137).
In USB or iPod mode the audio system oper-
ates in an equivalent way to the CD player play-
ing back music files. For more information, see
page 142.
NOTE
The system supports the playback of music
files in the MP3, WMA and WAV file formats.
However, there are variants of these file for-
mats that are not supported by the system.
The system also supports the majority of
iPod models produced in 2005 or later.
iPod Shuffle is not supported.
Audio system
04
``
USB connection* and RSE*
If the car is equipped with RSE* then the USB
connection* is located in accordance with the
above illustration.
Audio sources
USB memory
To facilitate the use of a USB memory stick,
only store music files on it. It takes a lot longer
for the system to load storage media that con-
tains anything other than compatible music
files.
NOTE
The system supports removable media
which is compatible with USB 2.0 and the
FAT32 file system, and can handle a maxi-
mum of 500 folders and 64 000 files. The
memory must have a capacity of at least 256
Mb.
NOTE
When using a longer model USB memory
stick the use of the enclosed USB adapter
cable is recommended. This is to avoid
mechanical wear to the USB input and the
connected USB memory stick.
MP3 player
Many MP3 players have their own file systems
that are not supported by the audio system. For
use in the system, an MP3 player must be set
in USB Removable device/Mass Storage
Device mode.
iPod
An iPod is charged and supplied with power
by the USB connection* via the player's con-
nection cable. However, if the player's battery
is fully discharged then it must be charged
before being connected.
NOTE
When an iPod is used as audio source, the
car's infotainment system has a menu
structure that is similar to the iPod player's
own menu structure.
For information on USB and iPod in combi-
nation with Performance audio, see the acces-
sory manual for USB andiPod Music
Interface.
CD functions
Centre console, controls for CD functions.
CD eject
CD insert and eject slot
Navigation button for changing CD tracks
Audio system
04
Fast-wind and change CD track
CD changer position selection*
Scan CD
Start playback (CD player)
If a music CD is in the player when CD is
pressed then playback is started automatically.
Otherwise, insert a disc and press CD.
Start playback (CD changer)
Start CD playback by pressing the CD button.
If a music CD is in the player when this takes
place then playback is started automatically.
Otherwise, insert a disc and press CD.
Insert a CD (CD changer)
1. Select an empty position with the number
buttons 16 or / on the navigation
button (4).
An empty position is marked on the dis-
play. The text Insert disc shows that a new
disc can be inserted. The CD changer can
hold up to six CDs.
2. Insert a CD in the CD changer slot.
Disc eject
A CD will stay in the ejected position for
approx. 12 seconds. Following which it is re-
inserted in the player and playback continues.
Eject individual discs by pressing the eject but-
ton.
Eject all discs with a long press on the eject
button. The entire magazine is emptied disc by
disc.
Pause
If the volume is turned down completely, the
CD player is stopped. The player is restarted
when volume is increased.
Audio files
3
The CD player also supports MP3 and WMA
format audio files.
NOTE
Some copy protected audio files may not be
read by the player.
When a CD with audio files is inserted into the
player the disc's file structure is loaded.
Depending on the quality of the disc and the
quantity of information there may be a delay
before playback starts.
Navigation and playback
If a disc containing audio files is inside the CD
player then ENTER leads to the disc's direc-
tory structure. The directory structure is navi-
gated in the same way as the audio system's
menu structure. Audio files have the symbol
and directories have the symbol .
Start audio file playback with ENTER.
When the playback of a file is finished the play-
back of the other files in the same directory
continues. Directory change takes place auto-
matically when all files in the current directory
have been played back.
Fast-wind/change CD tracks and audio
files
Short presses / on the navigation button
are used to scroll between CD tracks/audio
files. Long presses are used to fast-wind CD
tracks/audio files. The steering wheel keypad
can also be used for this purpose. Track
change can also be made by turning
TUNING.
Scan CD
This function plays the first ten seconds of
each CD track/audio file. Press SCAN to acti-
vate. Interrupt with EXIT or SCAN to continue
playback of the current CD track/audio file.
3
High Performance and Premium Sound.
Audio system
04
``
143
Random
This function plays the tracks in random order.
The random CD tracks/audio files can be scrol-
led through in the normal way.
NOTE
It is only possible to scroll between random
CD tracks on the current disc.
Different messages appear depending on
which random function has been selected:
RANDOM means that the tracks from only
one music CD are played
RND ALL means that all tracks on all
music CDs in the CD changer are played.
RANDOM FOLDER means that the audio
files in a directory on the current CD are
played.
CD player
If a normal music CD is being played, activate/
deactivate under Random.
If a disc with audio files is being played, acti-
vate/deactivate under Random Folder.
CD changer
If a normal music CD is being played under
Random Single disc or Random All
discs. The option All discs only applies to the
music CDs in the changer.
If a CD with audio files is being played, activate/
deactivate instead under Random Folder.
If you select another CD the function is deac-
tivated.
Track information
If track information is stored on a music CD
then it can be shown on the display. This also
applies to MP3 and WMA files for Premium
Sound and High Performance. Activate/deac-
tivate in CD mode under CD settings Track
information.
Radio functions
Centre console, controls for radio functions.
Navigation button for tuning, automatic
Cancel function in progress
Tuning, manual
Scan wavelength
Preset storage, automatic
Preset buttons and preset storage, manual
Select wavelength AM and FM (FM1 and
FM2)
Tuning, automatic
1. Select wavelength using FM or AM.
2. Press / on the navigation button.
Tuning, manual
2. Turn TUNING.
Preset
10 station presets can be stored per wave-
length. FM has 2 memories for presets: FM1
and FM2. The stored presets are selected
using the preset buttons.
Preset storage can be carried out manually or
automatically.
Preset storage, manual
1. Tune into a station.
2. Hold in a station preset button until the
message Channel stored appears on the
display.
Audio system
04
144
Preset storage, automatic
The function is especially useful in areas where
the radio stations and their frequencies are
unfamiliar. The 10 strongest radio stations are
stored automatically in a separate memory.
2. Hold in AUTO until Autostoring appears
on the display.
Once Autostoring disappears from the dis-
play, the stations are stored. The radio contin-
ues in Auto mode and Auto appears on the
display. The automatically stored presets can
now be selected using the preset buttons.
Automatic preset storage can be cancelled
using EXIT.
Auto mode is cancelled by pressing for exam-
ple AUTO or FM.
Returning to Auto mode provides access to the
autostored presets:
1. Press AUTO.
> Auto appears on the display.
2. Press a preset button.
Scan wavelength
The function automatically searches the cur-
rent wavelength for strong stations. When a
station is found, it is played for approx. 8 sec-
onds before scanning is resumed.
1. Select wavelength using AM or FM.
2. Press SCAN.
SCAN appears on the display. Close using
SCAN or EXIT.
RDS functions
RDS (Radio Data System) links FM transmitters
into a network. An FM transmitter in such a
network sends information that gives an RDS
radio the following functions:
Automatically switches to a stronger trans-
mitter if reception in the area is poor.
Searches for programme type, such as
traffic information or news.
Receives text information on current radio
programme.
NOTE
Some radio stations do not use RDS or only
some if its functionality.
If a required programme type is located the
radio can switch stations interrupting the audio
source currently in use. For example, if the CD
player is in use, it is paused. The interrupting
transmission is played at a preset volume, see
page 146. The radio returns to the previous
audio source and volume when the set pro-
gramme type is no longer broadcast.
The programme functions alarm (ALARM!),
traffic information (TP (Traffic information)),
news (News), and programme types (PTY
(Program type)) interrupt one another in order
of priority, where alarm has the highest priority
and programme types has the lowest. For fur-
ther programme interruption settings (EON
and Regional), see page 145. Press EXIT to
return to the interrupted audio source.
Alarm
This function is used to warn of serious acci-
dents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot be
temporarily interrupted or deactivated. The
message ALARM! appears on the display
when an alarm message is transmitted.
Traffic information TP
This function allows traffic information sent
within a set station's RDS network to break
through. The TP (Traffic information) symbol
indicates that the function is activated. If the
set station can send traffic information then
appears on the display.
Activate/deactivate under FM settings
TP (Traffic information).
TP from current station/all stations
The radio can interrupt with traffic information
from only the set (current) station or from all
stations.
Audio system
04
``
145
Go to FM settings Advanced radio

settings TP Station... to change.
News
This function allows news broadcasts sent
within a set station's RDS network to break
through. The NEWS symbol indicates that the
function is active.
Activate/deactivate under FM settings
News.
News from current/all stations
The radio can interrupt with news from only the
set (current) station or from all stations.
Go to FM settings Advanced radio

settings News station... to change.
Programme types PTY
The PTY function can be used to select differ-
ent programme types, such as pop music and
serious classic. The PTY symbol indicates that
the function is active. This function allows pro-
gramme types broadcast within a set station's
RDS network to break through.
1. Activate in FM mode by selecting a pro-
gramme type under FM settings PTY
Select PTY.
2. Deactivate by clearing the PTY under FM
settings Clear all PTY.
PTY search
This function searches the entire wavelength
for the selected programme type.
1. Select a PTY under FM settings PTY
Select PTY.
2. Go to FM settings
PTY (Program type) Search PTY.
If the radio finds any of the selected pro-
gramme types, >| To seek appears on the dis-
play.
To continue searching for another broad-
cast of the selected programme types,
press on the navigation button.
Display of programme type
The programme type of the current station can
be shown on the display.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
settings PTY Show PTY
NOTE
Not all radio stations support display of pro-
gramme type.
Radio text
Some RDS stations transmit information on
programme content, artists, etc. This informa-
tion can be shown on the display.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under
Radio text.
Automatic frequency update AF
This function selects one of the strongest
transmitters for a set station. The function may
need to search through the entire FM wave-
length to find a strong transmitter. If this
occurs, the radio mutes and PI Seek Press
Exit to cancel appears on the display.
settings Advanced radio settings
AF.
Regional radio programmes REG
This function causes the radio to continue with
a regional transmitter even if its signal strength
is low. The symbol REG shows that the func-
tion is active.
settings Advanced radio settings
Regional.
Enhanced Other Networks EON
This function is useful in urban areas with many
regional radio stations. It allows the distance
Audio system
04
146
between the car and the radio station trans-
mitter to determine when programme functions
should interrupt the current audio source.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode by select-
ing one of the options under FM settings
Advanced radio settings EON:
Local interrupts only if the radio station
transmitter is close.
Distant
4
interrupts if the station trans-
mitter is far away, even if there is a lot of
static.
Off no interruption for programmes from
other transmitters.
Resetting RDS functions
All radio settings can be reset to the original
factory settings.
The reset is carried out in FM mode under
FM settings Advanced radio settings
Reset all.
Volume control, programme types
The interrupting programme types, e.g.
NEWS or TP, are heard at the volume selected
for each respective programme type. If the vol-
ume level is adjusted during the programme
interruption, the new level is saved until the
next programme interruption.
Menu structure FM
Main menu FM
FM settings
1.1 News
1.2 TP (Traffic information)
1.3 Radio text
1.4 PTY (Program type)
1.4.1 Select PTY
Clear all PTY
Current affairs
Information
Sport
Education
Drama
Culture
Science
Varied speech
Pop music
Rock music
Easy listening
Light classic
Classical
Other music
Weather & metro
Finance
Children's programs
Social affairs
Religion
Phone in
Travel & touring
Leisure & hobby
Jazz music
Country music
National music
Oldies music
Folk music
Documentary
1.4.2 Search PTY
1.4.3 Show PTY text
1.5. Advanced radio settings
1.5.1 TP station
1.5.2 News station
4
Factory settings.
Audio system
04
``
1.5.3 AF
1.5.4 EON
Off
Local
Distant
1.5.5 Regional
1.5.6 Reset FM sett.
Radio system - DAB*
General
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is a digital
broadcasting system for radio.
NOTE
This system does not support DAB+.
Service and Ensemble
Service - Channel, radio channel (only
audio services are supported by the sys-
tem).
Ensemble - A collection of radio channels
on the same frequency.
Storing channel groups (Ensemble learn)
When the vehicle is moved to a new broad-
casting area, programming of existing channel
groups in the area can take place.
Programming of channel groups creates an
updated list of all available channel groups.
The list is not updated automatically. Program-
ming takes place via the Ensemble learn
menu or directly by means of a long press on
AUTO. If can take up to a minute to program a
channel group if both Band III and LBand are
selected.
Wavelength
DAB is transmitted on two wavelengths
5
; Band
III and LBand.
Band III over the whole country
6
LBand - mainly in large cities
By selecting for example Band III on its own,
channel programming takes place more
quickly than if both Band III and LBand are
selected. It is not certain that all channel
groups will be found. Wavelength selection
does not affect the stored memories.
Navigation via lists
There are three types of basic list which can be
used for navigation:
Ensemble - Shows channel groups that
the receiver has obtained via channel
group programming.
Service - Shows channels irrespective of
the channel group to which they are allo-
cated. The list can also be filtered using
DAB PTY (see below).
Subchannel - Subchannels to a selected
channel.
The lists can be accessed via the menu. The
channel groups can also be accessed by
pressing ENTER.
Scanning
Scanning means that all channels in the list are
played for 10 seconds each.
Press SCAN to activate
Scanning can also be selected in DAB-PTY
mode. In which case only channels of the pre-
selected programme type are played.
Stop scanning by pressing SCAN once, or
by pressing EXIT.
Subchannel
Secondary components are usually named
subchannels. These are temporary and can
contain e.g. translations of the main pro-
gramme into other languages.
5
Not all areas/countries use both wavelengths.
6
During a build-up phase DAB will not cover the whole country but will only work in larger urban areas.
Audio system
04
148
If one or more subchannels are broadcast then
the > symbol is shown to the right of the chan-
nel name in the display. A subchannel is indi-
cated by the > symbol appearing to the left of
the channel name in the display.
To access a subchannel:
Press
To navigate between subchannels:
Press or
Subchannels can only be accessed on the
selected main channel and not on any other
one without selecting it.
DAB PTY (program type)
DAB PTY selects one type of radio pro-
gramme. There are 29 different programme
types which also include different programme
categories. After selecting a programme type,
navigation only takes place within the channels
broadcasting that type.
Exit this mode as follows:
Press EXIT
It is also possible to select a preset channel or
exit DAB PTY via the menu. In certain cases
DAB radio will exit PTY mode when DAB to
DAB linking (see below) is implemented.
DAB to DAB link
It is possible to exit a channel with poor or no
reception to the same channel in another chan-
nel group with better reception. There may be
a certain delay when changing channel group.
There may be a period of silence between the
current channel no longer being available to the
new channel becoming available.
DAB display settings
1. Basic - Only the channel name is shown if
a primary component is being played. A
subchannel name is shown if it is a sub-
channel being played
2. Ensemble - Adds the channel group name
to the channel name
3. Ensemble +PTY - Adds the programme
type name under the channel name
Preset
10 station presets can be stored per wave-
length. DAB has 2 memories for presets:
DAB1 and DAB2. The stored presets are
selected using the preset buttons.
A preset contains one channel but no sub-
channels. If a subchannel is being played and
a preset is saved then only the channel ID is
registered. This is because subchannels are
temporary. At the next attempt to retrieve the
preset, the channel which contained the sub-
channel will be played. The preset is not
dependent on the channel list.
A saved channel does not have to be in the
channel list for it to be playable. If the channel
is loaded when it is not available then a preset
number is shown and there is silence until an
available preset is selected for loading. Alter-
natively another channel.
NOTE
The audio system's DAB system does not
support all functions available in the DAB
standard.
Menu structure DAB
Main menu DAB
1. Select ensemble
2. Select service
3. Select subchannel
4. DAB PTY
4.1. DAB PTY off
4.2. News
4.3. Current affairs
4.4. Information
4.5. Sport
Audio system
04
149
4.6. Education
4.7. Drama
4.8. Culture
4.9. Science
4.10. Varied speech
4.11. Pop music
4.12 Rock music
4.13. Calm music
4.14. Light classic
4.15. Serious classic
4.16. Other music
4.17. Weather & metro
4.18. Finance
4.19 Children
4.20. Factual
4.21. Religion
4.22. Phone in
4.23. Travel & touring
4.24. Leisure & hobby
4.25. Jazz and blues
4.26. Country music
4.27. National music
4.28. Oldies music
4.29. Folk music
4.30. Documentary
5. Ensemble learn
6. DAB settings
6.1. DAB display settings
6.1.1. Ensemble name
6.1.2. Ensemble name and
PTY
6.1.3. Basic
6.2. DAB to DAB link
6.3. FM traffic
6.4. Select DAB band
6.4.1. Band III
6.4.2. LBand
6.4.3. LBand & Band III
6.5. Reset DAB
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen*
04
General
The RSE system can be used at the same time
as the car's infotainment system.
When the rear seat passengers are using DVD,
RSE-AUX or watching TV
1
while listening with
headphones, the driver and front seat passen-
ger can still use the car's radio or CD player.
Power consumption, ignition positions
The system can be activated in ignition position
I or II and while the engine is running. When the
car is being started the film stops temporarily
and continues when the engine has started.
When the system has been used once without
the ignition in position I it is blocked. To restart,
ignition position I must be activated.
NOTE
In the event of extended use (more than 10
minutes) with the engine switched off - the
capacity of the car's battery may decrease
to such a low level that the engine cannot
be started.
In which case a message will appear on the
screen.
TV overview
Press and select TV I DVD I AUX
TV MEDIA MENU.
Channel lock list
Channel manage-
ment
Channel search Management of
new carriers
Add carrier
Information on fre-
quency
Delete a frequency
Delete all frequen-
cies
Auto scan
System settings TV
Audio mode
Factory default
Time zone setting
CI module No CAM inserted
CI module infor-
mation
Signal strength
System settings TV
Press MEDIA MENU System settings
TV.
Languages
TV menu language
E.g. English
Pict. format 16:9
4:3
Automatic
1
TV is an option for the RSE system.
04
``
Mode (screen
mode)
Basic
Zoom
Full screen
Centered
Audio mode Right
Left
Banner timeout
The menus can be
displayed for
between
8-40 seconds.
System settings-Sound mode
Audio mode.
The original speech for a TV programme can
be replaced with speech in another language if
the programme is broadcast with several audio
tracks.
Audio Volume - 1, e.g.
ENG.
Volume - 2, e.g.
GER.
Audio mode Right
Left
Stereo
AC3
System settings-Factory settings
Factory default.
The system's factory settings are restored
here.
System settings-Time zone settings
Time zone setting.
For local programme times to be displayed
correctly the time zone must be set. The
GUIDE and INFO button menus and the clock
are affected by local time zones.
Pay channels
To watch pay channels a payment card must
be fitted in an adapter which is inserted into the
digital TV box.
G
0
3
1
5
1
0
The box is located under the hatch in the cargo
area
1. Open the hatch in the cargo area, the box
is protected by a cover.
2. Open the rubber cover on the box.
3. Fit the payment card into the adapter.
Make sure that it is fitted correctly.
4. Insert the adapter in the digital TV box.
Make sure that it is inserted correctly.
> The system will detect that it has
received new information.
5. Search to find the new channels that have
become available, see the section "Pay-
ment card TV channels" below.
04
Payment card TV channels
Search so that the system identifies the pay-
ment card's channels.
1. Press MEDIA MENU on the remote con-
trol.
2. Select Channel search Auto scan.
3.
Select country and press .
Formats supported by the digital TV box
The TV system supports MPEG-2 transmis-
sions. There is the option to receive
MPEG-4 transmissions if you buy an adapter.
This adapter is inserted into the digital TV box
and is fitted in the same way as the adapter for
the payment card. See the section "Pay chan-
nels" above.
Music
Playing back a CD disc
1. Insert the CD with the label side turned
from the buttons.
> The disc starts to play back automati-
cally.
2. Switch on the wireless headphones, select
CH A for left-hand screen or CH B for right-
hand screen.
> The sound is directed to the head-
phones.
3. Adjust the audio volume in the headphones
using the volume control/wheel on the
headphones.
Alternatively - activate the car's audio sys-
tem in MODE-AUX and press
A B
on
the remote control to listen via the speak-
ers.
Selecting within a disc directory
1. Load the disc.
2.
Press .
3. Scroll using the navigation buttons to
select a file.
4.
Press to select the subdirectory.
Different playback options
The disc can be played back in different ways,
scroll with the navigation buttons to select
playback option.
When the dialogue box appears:
1. Press the right-hand navigation button to
move over in the right-hand menu.
2. Scroll using the navigation buttons to
select playback options.
3.
Confirm with .
Change CD track
Change CD track with or

fast-wind by holding the buttons
depressed.
Pause
1.
Pause and restart the disc with .
2.
Stop the disc with .
3.
Press again to eject the disc.
Discs copied privately can be used.
However, playback and quality depend on the
quality of the source file, format and disc qual-
ity.
AUX input, Electrical socket 12 V
The input allows you to connect other equip-
ment. Always follow the instructions included
with the external equipment, or from the man-
ufacturer or reseller, when connecting. Equip-
ment connected via the RSE AUX input can use
the screens, wireless headphones, head-
phones sockets and the car's speakers.
04
``
Connecting the RSE AUX input
G
0
3
0
3
8
2
The RSE-AUX input is located under the front arm-
rest.
1. Connect the video cable to the yellow
socket.
2. Connect the left-hand audio cable to the
white socket and the right-hand one to the
red socket.
3. Connect the power cable to the power
socket if your equipment is designed for
12 V.
For electrical socket location, see page 190
System
Formats supported by the system.
Audio
format
CD-DA, DVD Audio Playback,
MP3, WMA
Video
format
DVD video, VCD, SVCD, DivX/
MPEG-4, WMA video, Photo CD
Kodak, Photo CD JPG
Disc
format
DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM, DVD-RW,
DVD+RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, CD-R,
CD-ROM, CD-RW, CD-3, HDCD
Advanced system settings
These settings can only be accessed when the
DVD player is empty.
Press MEDIA MENU.
GENERAL SETUP ANGLE MARK
CAPTION
AUDIO SETUP COMPRESSION
DVX(R)
REGISTRATION
PREFERENCES TV TYPE
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
DEFAULTS
Changing the battery in the remote
control and wireless headphones
The remote control and headphones are pow-
ered by 2 AAA batteries.
Take along extra batteries for a long journey.
1. Unscrew the screw and detach the battery
cover.
2. Remove the used batteries, turn the new
batteries in accordance with the symbols
in the battery compartment and insert
them.
3. Fit the cover and screw in the screw.
04
Wireless headphones
1. Unscrew the screw and detach the battery
cover.
2. Remove the used batteries, turn the new
batteries in accordance with the symbols
in the battery compartment and insert
them.
3. Fit the cover and screw in the screw.
NOTE
If the system is too hot to be used or if bat-
tery voltage is too low then an information
message appears on the screen.
Environmental care
Be sure to dispose of the exhausted batteries
in an environmentally safe manner.
Trip computer
04
``
General
G
0
2
1
3
6
4
Information display and controls.
READ - confirms
Thumbwheel browse between menus
and options in the trip computer list
RESET resets
To scroll through trip computer information,
turn the thumbwheel up or down in steps. Con-
tinue turning to return to the starting point.
Functions
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you are
using the trip computer, this message must
be acknowledged in order to revert to the
trip computer function. Acknowledge by
pressing READ.
To change unit indication for distance and
speed, contact a workshop. Volvo recom-
mends that you seek assistance from an
Average speed
The car calculates the average speed from the
last resetting. Reset using RESET.
Instantaneous
Current fuel consumption is calculated every
second. The information on the display is
updated every couple of seconds. When the
car is stationary, "----" appears on the display.
Average
The average fuel consumption since the last
reset. Reset using RESET.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if
a fuel-driven additional
1
and/or parking
heater* has been used.
Km to empty tank
The calculation is based on the average fuel
consumption over the last 30 km and the
remaining driveable fuel quantity. The display
shows the approximate distance that can be
driven with the fuel quantity remaining in the
tank.
An economic driving style generally results in a
longer driving distance. For more information
on how you can influence fuel consumption,
see page 10
No guaranteed range remains when the display
shows "--- km to empty tank". Refuel as soon
as possible.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if
the driving style has been changed.
Resetting
1. Select Average speed or Average.
1
Diesel cars only.
Trip computer
04
2. Press and hold RESET for
approx. 1 second to reset the selected
function. If RESET is kept depressed for at
least 3 three seconds then Average speed
and Average are reset simultaneously.
Current speed*
The instrument panel display shows current
speed in mph if the speedometer is graduated
in km/h. If the speedometer is graduated in
mph then the current speed is shown in km/h.
DSTC Stability and traction control system
04
``
157
General information on DSTC
The stability and traction control system, DSTC
(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control), helps
the driver to avoid skidding and improves the
car's traction.
The activation of the system during braking
may be noticed as a throbbing sound. The car
may accelerate slower than expected when the
accelerator pedal is depressed.
Active Yaw Control
The function limits the driving and brake force
of the wheels individually in order to stabilise
the car.
Spin Control
The function prevents the driving wheels from
spinning against the road surface during accel-
eration.
Traction control system
The function is active at low speed and trans-
fers power from the driving wheel that is spin-
ning to the one that is not.
Operation
Reduced operation
System operation during skidding and accel-
eration can be reduced. Operation during skid-
ding is delayed and so allows more skidding
which provides greater freedom for dynamic
driving. Traction in deep snow or sand is
improved as traction is no longer limited.
G
0
2
1
4
0
9
1. Turn the thumbwheel until the DSTC
menu is shown. DSTC ON means that the
system function is unchanged.
DSTC spin control OFF means that sys-
tem operation is reduced.
2. Press and hold RESET until the DSTC
menu is changed.
The system remains reduced until the engine is
next started.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics may dete-
riorate if the function is reduced.
Messages in the information display
DSTC Temporarily OFF
System temporarily reduced due to excessive
brake disc temperature. The function is reacti-
vated automatically when the brakes have
cooled.
DSTC Service required
System disabled due to a fault.
Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine. If the message remains when the
engine is restarted, drive to a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Symbols in the combined instrument
panel
If the symbols and are displayed
at the same time, read the message on the
information display.
If the symbol appears alone then it may
appear as follows:
DSTC Stability and traction control system
04
158
Flashing light means that the system is
now being activated.
Constant glow for 2 seconds means sys-
tem check when the engine is started.
Constant glow after starting the engine or
while driving means system fault.
Adapting driving characteristics
04
Active chassis (Four C)*
Active chassis, Four-C (Continously Controlled
Chassis Concept), regulates the characteris-
tics of the shock absorbers so that the car's
driving characteristics can be adjusted. There
are three settings: Comfort, Sport and
Advanced.
Comfort
This setting means that the car is perceived as
being more comfortable and is recommended
for longer journeys. Shock absorption is soft
and the movement of the body is smooth and
gentle.
Sport
This setting means that the car is perceived as
being more sporty and is recommended for
more active driving. Steering response is faster
than in the Comfort mode. Shock absorption is
harder and the body follows the road in order
to reduce rolling during fast cornering.
Advanced
This setting is only recommended on very even
and smooth road surfaces.
The shock absorbers are optimised for maxi-
mum roadholding and rolling in bends is further
minimised.
Operation
Chassis settings.
Use the buttons in the centre console to
change setting. The setting in use when the
engine is switched off is activated next time the
engine is started.
Speed related power steering*
Steering force increases with the speed of the
car to give the driver enhanced sensitivity. The
steering is firmer and more immediate on
motorways. Steering is light and requires no
extra effort when parking and at low speed.
Steering force can be set in three levels so that
you can select the level that suits you in terms
of road responsiveness or steering sensitivity.
Go to Car settings Steering force level in
the menu system.
page 120. This menu cannot be accessed
while the car is in motion.
Cruise control*
04
Operation
G
0
2
1
4
1
1
Display and controls.
Standby mode
Resume set speed
Deactivating
Activate/set speed
Set speed (in brackets = standby mode)
Activating and setting the speed
In order to enable the activation of cruise con-
trol, it must first be engaged in standby mode
with the CRUISE button . The symbol
illuminates in the display and the text (---) km/
h shows that cruise control is in standby
mode.
Cruise control is then activated with or
after which the current speed is stored and is
used as the set speed. The display text
(---) km/h changes to show the set speed, e.g.
100 km/h.
NOTE
Cruise control cannot be engaged at
speeds below 30 km/h.
Adjusting the set speed
In active mode the speed is adjusted with long
or short presses on or .
A temporary increase in speed using the accel-
erator, such as while overtaking, does not
affect the cruise control setting. When the
accelerator is released the car will return to the
set speed.
NOTE
If one of the cruise control buttons is kept
depressed for more than approx. one
minute then cruise control is disengaged.
The engine must then be switched off in
order to then reset cruise control.
Deactivation
Cruise control is disengaged with CRUISE or
by switching off the engine. The set speed is
cleared.
Temporary deactivation
Press On to disengage cruise control tem-
porarily. The saved speed is shown in brackets
in the display, e.g. (100) km/h.
Automatic temporary deactivation
Cruise control is deactivated spontaneously
when the driving wheels spin heavily or if the
car's speed falls below approx. 30 km/h.
Cruise control is also deactivated when the
brakes are used, when the gear selector is
moved to neutral position or if the driver main-
tains a speed faster than the set speed for
longer than 1 minute.
After deactivation cruise control changes over
to standby mode and the set speed is saved.
Resume set speed
If cruise control has been deactivated tempo-
rarily, it can be reactivated by pressing . The
speed is then set to the previously set speed.
NOTE
A significant increase in speed may arise
after the speed has been resumed with .
Adaptive cruise control*
04
``
General
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is designed to
assist the driver with support on long straight
roads in steady traffic, for example on motor-
ways and main roads.
WARNING
You must always pay attention to the traffic
conditions and intervene when adaptive
cruise control is not maintaining a suitable
speed or suitable distance.
Adaptive cruise control cannot cover all
driving situations and traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The Function section and after informs
about limitations that the driver must be
aware of before using the adaptive cruise
control.
When driving you are responsible for main-
taining the correct distance and speed,
even when adaptive cruise control is used.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of adaptive cruise control
components must only be performed at a
is recommended.
Function
G
0
2
1
4
1
2
Functions overview.
Warning lamp, braking by driver required
Controls
Radar sensor
Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise
control system and a coordinated spacing sys-
tem.
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
avoidance system. The driver must inter-
vene if the system does not detect a vehicle
in front.
Adaptive cruise control does not brake for
people or animals. Nor for oncoming, slow
or stationary vehicles and objects.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of
water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/
snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or
on slip roads.
The distance to the vehicle ahead is measured
by a radar sensor. The speed is regulated by
acceleration and braking. It is normal for the
brakes to emit a low sound when they are being
used by cruise control.
WARNING
The brake pedal moves when the cruise
control brakes. Do not rest your foot under
the brake pedal as it could become trapped.
The cruise control objective is to follow the
vehicle ahead but in the same lane and at a set
time interval. If the radar sensor has not
detected a vehicle ahead then the only objec-
04
tive is the set speed. This is also the case if the
speed of the vehicle ahead exceeds the cruise
control set speed.
The adaptive cruise control aims to control the
speed in a smooth way. In situations that
demand sudden braking you must brake your-
self. This applies with large differences in
speed, or if the vehicle in front brakes heavily.
Due to limitations in the radar sensor, braking
may come unexpectedly or not at all, see
page 164.
Adaptive cruise control can only be activated
above 30 km/h. If speed falls below 30 km/h or
if engine speed becomes too slow, then the
adaptive cruise control disengages and stops
braking. In which case the driver must imme-
diately take over and maintain the distance to
vehicles in front. The highest speed setting is
200 km/h.
Warning lamp, braking by driver required
Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacity
that is equivalent to approximately 30% of the
car's braking capacity.
If the car needs to brake more heavily than
cruise control capacity and the driver does not
brake, then the cruise control uses the collision
warning system's warning lamp and warning
sound to alert the driver that immediate inter-
vention is required.
NOTE
The warning lamp may be difficult to notice
in strong sunlight or when sunglasses are
being worn.
WARNING
Cruise control only warns of vehicles
detected by the radar sensor. Consequently
there may be no warning or it may be sub-
ject to a delay. Do not wait for a warning but
brake when it is necessary.
Operation
Display and controls.
Activate and resume settings, increase
speed
Standby mode, on/off
Set time interval
Set speed (in brackets = standby mode)
Set time interval during adjustment
Set time interval after adjustment
In order to enable the activation of cruise con-
trol, it must first be engaged in standby mode
with the button . The symbol illuminates
in the display and the characters (---) show
that cruise control is in standby mode.
Cruise control is then activated with or ,
after which the current speed is stored and is
used as the set speed. The display characters
(---) change to show the set speed, e.g. 100.
The car symbol is illuminated
on the left-hand side of the
display when the radar sensor
has detected another vehicle.
The distance to vehicles in
front is only regulated when
the symbol is illuminated.
NOTE
Cruise control cannot be engaged at
speeds below 30 km/h.
04
``
Adjusting the set speed
In active mode the speed is adjusted with long
or short presses on , or . In active
mode the button has the same function as
but results in a lower increase in speed.
NOTE
If one of the cruise control buttons is kept
depressed for more than approx. one
minute then cruise control is disengaged.
The engine must then be switched off in
order to then reset cruise control.
In some situations cruise control cannot be
activated. In which case Cruise control
Unavailable is shown in the display, see
page 165.
Set time interval
The set time interval to vehicles in front is
increased with and decreased with .
Five different time intervals
can be chosen from and
shown in the display as 15
horizontal lines the more
lines there are the longer the
time interval, see page 167
for table.
At low speed, when the distances are short, the
adaptive cruise control increases the time
interval slightly.
The adaptive cruise control allows the time
interval to vary noticeably in certain situations
in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in
front smoothly and comfortably.
Note that a short time interval only allows the
driver a short reaction time if any unforeseen
traffic problem should arise.
The number of lines for the
selected time interval is
shown during the setting itself
and for several seconds after-
wards. Then a smaller scale
version of the symbol is
shown to the right of the dis-
play. The same symbol is also shown when
Distance Alert is activated, see page 167.
NOTE
Only use the time interval that is allowed in
accordance with local traffic regulations.
If cruise control does not seem to react to
activation the reason may be that the time
interval to the closest vehicle prevents an
increase in speed.
The higher the speed, the longer the calcu-
lated distance in metres for a specific time
interval.
Deactivating and resuming settings
Cruise control is deactivated, either with a
short press on , or by means of driver inter-
vention, e.g. braking. The set speed is then
shown in brackets, e.g. (100). Speed and time
interval are resumed with one press on .
For each additional press on , when cruise
control is activated, the set speed increases in
stages of 1 km/h.
NOTE
A significant increase in speed may arise
after the speed has been resumed with .
A short press on in standby mode or a long
press in active mode deactivates cruise con-
trol. The set speed is cleared and cannot be
resumed.
Deactivation due to driver intervention
Cruise control is deactivated when the brakes
are used, the gear selector is moved to neutral
position, or if the accelerator pedal is
depressed for a longer period. Cruise control
then changes over to standby mode and the
driver must regulate vehicle speed manually.
If the accelerator pedal is kept depressed for a
shorter period, for example during overtaking,
cruise control is temporarily disengaged and
04
then re-engaged when the accelerator pedal is
released.
Automatic deactivation
Adaptive cruise control is dependent on other
systems e.g. stability and traction control sys-
tem (DSTC). If any of these systems stop work-
ing then cruise control is automatically deacti-
vated.
In the event of automatic deactivation a signal
will sound and the message Cruise control
Cancelled is shown in the display. The driver
must then intervene and adapt the speed to
vehicles in front.
An automatic deactivation can be due to:
speed falls below 30 km/h
wheels lose traction
brake temperature is high
engine speed is too low
the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet
snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).
The radar sensor and its limitations
Apart from the adaptive cruise control, the
radar sensor is also used by the Collision
Warning with Auto Brake function (see
page 170) and the Distance Alert function (see
page 167). It is designed to detect cars or
larger vehicles driving in the same direction.
Modification of the radar sensor could result in
it being illegal to use.
WARNING
Accessories or other objects such as auxil-
iary lamps must not be installed in front of
the grille.
The capacity of the radar sensor to detect vehi-
cles in front is reduced significantly:
if the radar sensor becomes blocked and
cannot detect other vehicles e.g. in heavy
rain or slush, or if other objects have col-
lected in front of the radar sensor.
NOTE
Keep the surface in front of the radar sensor
clean.
if the speed of vehicles in front is signifi-
cantly different from your own speed.
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In
some situations it may detect another vehicle
later than expected or not detect any vehicle at
all.
G
0
2
1
4
1
4
Radar sensor field of vision (grey).
Sometimes the radar sensor cannot detect
vehicles at close quarters, for example a
vehicle that drives in between your car and
vehicles in front.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or
vehicles not driving in the centre of the lane
can remain undetected.
04
``
In bends the radar sensor may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle
from view.
Fault tracing and action
If the display shows the message Radar
blocked See manual this means that the
radar signals from the radar sensor are blocked
and that vehicles in front of the car could not
be detected.
In turn this means that the Adaptive Cruise
Control, Distance Alert and Collision Warning
with Auto Brake functions are not operating
either.
The table presents possible causes for a mes-
sage being shown along with the appropriate
action.
Cause Action
The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.
Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals. No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or
snowfall.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar sig-
nals.
No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy
road surface.
The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains. Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no
longer blocked.
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol Message Specification
Standby mode or active mode without detected vehicle.
Active mode with detected vehicle to which cruise control adapts the speed.
Set time interval, during adjustment.
04
Set time interval, after adjustment.
Turn on DSTC
to enable Cruise
Cruise control cannot be activated until the traction control and stability function (DSTC) has been
activated.
Cruise control
Cancelled
The cruise control has been shut down.
The driver must regulate the speed.
Cruise control
Unavailable
Cruise control cannot be activated.
This could be due to:
brake temperature is high
the radar sensor is blocked e.g. by wet snow or rain.
Radar blocked
See manual
Cruise control temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event that heavy rain or slush
has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 164.
Cruise control
Service required
Cruise control not working.
Contact with an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Distance Alert
04
``
167
General
Distance Alert is a function that indicates the
time interval to vehicles in front.
The distance information is only provided for
vehicles driving in front of the car and in the
same direction. No distance information is pro-
vided for oncoming, slow or stationary vehi-
cles.
G
0
1
7
3
6
2
A small section of the red warning lamp in the
windscreen illuminates with a constant glow
when driving closer than the set time interval to
vehicles in front.
NOTE
Distance Alert is deactivated during the time
that Adaptive Cruise Control is active.
Distance Alert is active at speeds above
30 km/h.
WARNING
Distance Alert only shows the distance to
vehicles in front the speed of the car is not
affected.
Operation
Press the button in the centre console to switch
the function on or off. The function is switched
on if one lamp is illuminated in the button.
Set time interval
The buttons for setting the time interval to vehi-
cles in front are located to the left in the steer-
ing wheel. Time intervals are increased using
and decreased using .
Five different time intervals
can be chosen from and
shown in the display as 15
horizontal lines the more
lines there are the longer the
time interval.
Number of lines Time interval
(seconds)
1 1.0
2 1.4
3 1.8
4 2.2
5 2.6
The number of lines for the
selected time interval is
shown during the setting itself
and for several seconds after-
wards. Then a smaller scale
version of the symbol is
shown to the right of the dis-
play. The same symbol is also shown when
adaptive cruise control is activated.
Distance Alert
04
168
NOTE
The higher the speed, the longer the calcu-
lated distance in metres for a specific time
interval.
The set time interval is also used by the
adaptive cruise control function, see
page 162.
Only use the time interval that is allowed in
accordance with local traffic regulations.
Limitations
The function uses the same radar sensor as
adaptive cruise control and the collision warn-
ing system. For more information on the radar
sensor and its limitations, see page 164.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia-
tions in light intensity, as well as wearing
sunglasses, could mean that the warning
light in the windscreen cannot be seen.
Poor weather or winding roads could affect the
radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles in
front. The size of other vehicles could also
affect detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles.
This could mean that the warning lamp illumi-
nates at a shorter distance than the setting or
that the warning is temporarily absent.
Extremely high speeds can also cause the
lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than
that set due to limitations in sensor range.
Set time interval, during adjustment.
Set time interval, after adjustment.
Distance Alert
04
169
Radar blocked.
See manual
Distance Alert temporarily disengaged.
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor see page 164.
Collision warn. Service
required
Distance Alert or Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*
04
General
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is designed
to assist the driver when there is a risk of col-
liding with a vehicle in front that is stationary or
driving in the same direction.
The collision warning system has the following
three functions.
Collision warning warns the driver of a
potentially imminent collision.
Brake support assists the driver to brake
effectively in a critical situation.
Auto Brake brakes the car automatically
when a collision is unavoidable. The Auto
Brake function cannot prevent a collision
but instead aims to reduce collision speed.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of collision warning system
components must only be performed at a
is recommended.
WARNING
The collision warning system does not work
in all driving situations and traffic, weather
and road conditions. The collision warning
system does not react to vehicles driving in
another direction to the car or to people and
animals.
Warning only activated in the event of a high
risk for collision. The Function section and
the section after advise about limitations of
which the driver should be aware before
using Collision Warning with Auto Brake.
The Auto Brake function can only reduce the
collision speed. The driver must depress the
brake pedal to achieve full brake function.
Never wait for a collision warning. When
driving you are responsible for maintaining
the correct distance and speed, even when
the collision warning system is used.
Function
G
0
1
7
3
8
2
Functions overview.
Visual warning signal in the event of a col-
lision risk
Radar sensor
Camera sensor
Collision warning
Together with a camera sensor, the radar sen-
sor detects stationary vehicles as well as vehi-
cles driving in the same direction in front of the
car. In the event of there being a risk of collision
with such a vehicle your attention is drawn with
a red flashing warning lamp and a warning
sound.
The collision warning system is active from and
including 7 km/h.
04
``
Brake support
If the risk of collision still increases after the
collision warning then the brake support is acti-
vated. The brake support prepares the brake
system for rapid braking and the brakes are
applied gently, which may be noticed as a
slight jerk.
If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently
quickly then full brake function is implemented,
even with light pedal force.
Auto Brake
If the driver has not yet started an evasive
manoeuvre in this situation and the risk of a
collision is imminent then the Auto Brake func-
tion comes into effect, without the driver need-
ing to touch the brake pedal. Braking then
takes place with limited brake force in order to
reduce collision speed. The driver has to brake
in order to achieve full brake force.
Operation
Settings are made from the centre console dis-
play via a menu system. For information on
how the menu system is used, see page 120.
NOTE
The Auto Brake function is always switched
on and cannot be switched off.
On and Off
To select whether the collision warning system
should be switched on or off: Under the Car
settings Collision warning settings menu,
select between the options for On or Off. The
setting selected when the engine was switched
off is automatically obtained when the engine
is started.
Activating/deactivating warning signals
The warning sound and warning lamp are acti-
vated automatically when the engine is started
if the system is switched on.
The warning sound can be activated/deacti-
vated separately using the options for On or
Off under Car settings Collision warning
settings Warning sound.
Set warning distance
The warning distance regulates the distance at
which the visual and acoustic warnings are
deployed. Select one of the options from
Long, Normal or Short under Car settings
Collision warning settings Warning
distance.
The warning distance determines the system's
sensitivity. Warning distance Long provides an
earlier warning. First test with Long and if this
setting produces too many warnings, which
could be perceived as irritating in certain sit-
uations, then change to warning distance
Normal.
Only use warning distance Short in excep-
tional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.
NOTE
When the adaptive cruise control is in use
the warning lamp and warning sound will be
used by the cruise control even if the colli-
sion warning system is switched off.
The collision warning system warns the
driver in the event of a risk of a collision, but
the function cannot shorten driver reaction
time.
In order for the collision warning system to
be effective, always drive with the Distance
Alert set at time interval 4 5. see
page 167.
NOTE
Even if the warning distance has been set to
Long then in certain situations warnings
could be perceived as being late. E.g. in the
event of large differences in speed or if vehi-
cles in front brake heavily.
Checking settings
The settings required can be controlled on the
centre console display. Access via the menu
04
for Car settings Collision warning
settings, see page 120.
Limitations
The visual warning signal may be difficult to
notice in the event of strong sunlight, reflec-
tions, when sunglasses are being worn or if the
driver is not looking straight ahead. The warn-
ing sound should therefore always be acti-
vated.
NOTE
The visual warning signal can be temporarily
disengaged in the event of high passenger
compartment temperature caused by
strong sunlight for example. If this occurs
then the warning sound is activated even if
it is deactivated in the menu system.
Warnings may not appear if the dis-
tance to the vehicle in front is small or if
steering wheel and pedal movements
are large, e.g. a very active driving style.
WARNING
Warnings and braking action could be
implemented late or not at all if the traffic
situation or external influences mean that
the radar or camera sensor cannot detect a
vehicle in front correctly.
The sensor system has a limited range for
stationary or slow vehicles so the system
provides less effective warnings or no warn-
ings at all at a higher vehicle speed (above
70 km/h) for such vehicles.
Warnings for stationary or slow vehicles
could be disengaged due to darkness.
The collision warning system uses the same
radar sensors as adaptive cruise control. For
more information on the radar sensor and its
limitations, see page 164.
An absent or late warning could mean that
there is no brake support or it comes late.
If warnings are perceived as being too frequent
or disturbing then the warning distance can be
reduced. This would lead to the system warn-
ing at a later stage, which reduces the total
number of warnings.
Camera sensor limitations
The car's camera sensor is used by the three
functions - Collision Warning with Auto Brake,
Driver Alert Control, see page 175 and Lane
Departure Warning, see page 178.
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
camera sensor clean from ice, snow, mist
and dirt.
Do not attach or fit anything to the wind-
screen in front of the camera sensor, as this
could reduce or prevent the function of one
or more camera-dependent systems.
The camera sensors have limitations similar to
the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in dark-
ness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog for
example. Under such conditions the functions
of camera-dependent systems could be sig-
nificantly reduced or temporarily disengaged.
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the car-
riageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty
road surfaces or unclear lane markings could
also significantly reduce a camera sensor func-
tion. Functions such as scanning the carriage-
way and detecting other vehicles for example.
During very high temperatures the camera is
temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes
after the engine is started in order to protect
camera functionality.
04
``
Fault tracing and action
If the display shows the message Windscreen
Sensors blocked then this means that the
camera sensor is blocked and cannot detect
vehicles or road markings in front of the car.
In turn this means that the Collision Warning
with Auto Brake, Lane Departure Warning and
Driver Alert Control functions are not operating
with full functionality.
The table presents possible causes for a mes-
sage being shown along with the appropriate
action.
Cause Action
The windscreen sur-
face in front of the
camera is dirty or
covered with ice or
snow.
Clean the wind-
screen surface in
front of the camera
from dirt, ice and
snow.
Thick fog, heavy rain
or snow means that
the camera does not
work sufficiently
well.
No action. At times
the camera does not
work during heavy
rain or snowfall.
Cause Action
The windscreen sur-
face in front of the
camera has been
cleaned but the
message remains.
Wait. It may take
several minutes for
the camera to meas-
ure the visibility.
Dirt has appeared
between the inside
of the windscreen
and the camera.
Visit a workshop to
have the windscreen
inside the camera
cover cleaned - an
authorised Volvo
workshop is recom-
mended.
Collis'n warning OFF Collision warning system switched off.
Shown when the engine is started.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the READ button.
Collision warn. Unavailable The collision warning system cannot be activated.
Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the READ button.
04
Auto braking was acti-
vated
Auto Brake has been active.
Windscreen Sensors
blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 172.
Radar blocked. See man-
ual
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 164.
Collision warn. Service
required
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.
Driver Alert System DAC*
04
``
Introduction
The Driver Alert System is intended to assist
drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or
who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are
driving on.
The Driver Alert System consists of two differ-
ent functions, which can either be switched on
at the same time or individually:
Driver Alert Control (DAC)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW), see
page 178.
A switched-on function is set in standby mode
and is not activated automatically until speed
exceeds 65 km/h.
The function is deactivated again when speed
decreases to below 60 km/h.
Both functions use a camera which is depend-
ent on the lane having side markings painted
on each side.
WARNING
The Driver Alert System does not work in all
situations but is instead only intended to be
of supplementary assistance.
The driver always has ultimate responsibility
that the car is driven safely.
General information on Driver Alert
Control - DAC
G
0
1
7
3
3
2
The function is intended to attract the driver's
attention when he/she starts to drive less con-
sistently, e.g. if he/she becomes distracted or
starts to fall asleep.
A camera detects the side markings painted on
the carriageway and compares the section of
the road with the driver's steering wheel move-
ments. The driver is alerted if the vehicle does
not follow the carriageway evenly.
NOTE
The camera sensor has certain limitations,
see page 172.
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly dete-
riorating driving ability and it is primarily
intended for major roads. The function is not
intended for city traffic.
In some cases driving ability is not affected
despite driver fatigue. In which case there may
not be any warning issued for the driver. For
this reason it is always important to stop and
take a break in the event of any signs of driver
fatigue, irrespective of whether or not DAC
issues a warning.
NOTE
The function must not be used to extend a
driving stint. Always plan breaks at regular
intervals and ensure that you are fully
rested.
Limitation
In some cases the system may issue a warning
despite driving ability not deteriorating, for
example:
if the driver tests the LDW function.
in strong side winds.
on rutted road surfaces.
04
Operation
Some settings are made from the centre con-
sole display and its menu system. For informa-
tion on how the menu system is used, see
page 120.
The current status can be checked on the trip
computer display with the left-hand stalk
switch.
Thumbwheel. Turn the rotary control until
the display shows Driver
Alert. The second row displays the Off, U
navailable or Level mark options.
READ button. Confirms or clears a warning
in the memory.
Activating Driver Alert Control
Using the centre console display with its menu
system, locate Car settings Driver Alert.
Select the On option.
The function is activated when speed
exceeds 65 km/h and it remains
active as long as the speed exceeds
60 km/h. The display shows a level
mark with 1-5 bars, where a low number of bars
indicates inconsistent driving ability. A high
number of bars indicates stable driving.
If the vehicle is driven inconsistently then the
driver is alerted by an acoustic signal as well as
the text message Driver Alert Time for a
break. The warning is repeated after a time if
driving ability does not improve.
WARNING
An alarm should be taken most seriously as
a sleepy driver is not usually aware of his/
her condition.
In the event of an alarm or signs of driver
fatigue; stop the car in a safe manner as
soon as possible and rest.
Studies have shown that it is equally as dan-
gerous to drive when tired as it is under the
influence of alcohol.
Driver Alert OFF Function not switched on.
Driver Alert Unavailable Speed is lower than 60 km/h, the carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor
is temporarily disengaged. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 172.
04
Driver Alert The function analyses the driver's driving style.
The number of bars can vary in the range 1-5, where a low number of bars indicates inconsistent
driving ability. A high number of bars indicates stable driving.
Driver Alert Time for a
break
The vehicle has been driven inconsistently; the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.
Windscreen Sensors
blocked
Driver Alert Sys Service
required
The system is disengaged.
Driver Alert System - LDW*
04
General information on Lane Departure
Warning - LDW
The function is intended to reduce the risk for
single-vehicle accidents accidents where, in
certain situations, the vehicle leaves the car-
riageway and is in danger of driving either into
a ditch or into oncoming traffic.
LDW consists of a camera that detects the side
markings painted on the carriageway. The
driver is alerted by an acoustic signal if the
vehicle crosses a side marking.
Operation and function
The function is switched on or off by means of
a switch on the centre console. An indicator
lamp in the button illuminates when the func-
tion is switched on.
The trip computer display shows Lane Depart
Warn Unavailable when the function is in
standby mode.
The LDW function is activated automatically
from standby mode after the camera has scan-
ned in the carriageway's side markings and
speed exceeds 65 km/h. The trip computer
display then shows Lane Depart Warn
Available.
If the camera can no longer detect the carria-
geway's side markings or if speed decreases
to below 60 km/h then the function resumes
standby mode and the display shows Lane
Depart Warn Unavailable.
If the vehicle crosses the left or right-hand side
marking of the carriageway without due cause
then the driver is alerted by an acoustic signal.
No warning is given in the following situations:
Direction indicators activated
The driver has his/her foot on the brake
pedal
1
In the event of the accelerator pedal being
depressed rapidly
1
In the event of rapid steering wheel move-
ments
1
In the event of a sudden turn so that the car
rolls.
The camera sensor also has certain limitations.
NOTE
The driver is only warned once each time the
wheels cross a line. So there is no acoustic
alarm when there is a line between the car's
wheels.
1
A warning is still given when Increased sensitivity is selected, see page 180.
04
``
Lane departure warning
On/Off
The function is switched on/off.
Shown at switch-on/off.
The text disappears after 5 seconds.
Lane Depart Warn Availa-
ble
The function scans the carriageway's side markings.
Lane Depart Warn Unavail-
able
Speed is lower than 60 km/h, the carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor
is temporarily disengaged. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 172.
Windscreen Sensors
blocked
Driver Alert Sys Service
required
The system is disengaged.
04
Personal preferences
See the centre console display with its menu
system and there search for Car settings
Lane departure warning, see page 120.
Select the option required:
On at start up: This option sets the function in
standby mode each time the car is started.
Otherwise the same value as when the engine
was switched off is obtained.
Increased sensitivity: This option increases
sensitivity, an alarm is triggered earlier and
fewer limitations apply.
Park assist syst*
04
``
General
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the
audio system display indicate the distance to
the detected obstacle.
Parking assistance is available in two variants:
Rear only
Both front and rear.
WARNING
Parking assistance does not relinquish the
driver's own responsibility during parking.
The sensors have blind spots where obsta-
cles cannot be detected. Be aware of chil-
dren and animals near the car.
Function
The system is automatically activated when the
car is started and the switch's On/Off lamp is
illuminated. If parking assistance is switched
off with the button, the lamp goes out.
The centre console display shows an overview
of the relationship between the car and
detected obstacle.
Marked fields show which of the four sensors
detected an obstacle. The more marked fields
in the same bar, the shorter the distance
between the car and detected obstacle.
The frequency of the signal increases the
shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of
or behind the car. Other sound from the audio
system is muted automatically.
Acti ve
Acti ve
Acti ve
1
2
3
Display screens in different situations.
Display in car with only rear sensors.
Obstacle detected by both right-hand sen-
sors.
Display in car with both front and rear sen-
sors. The front right-hand sensor is 30 cm
or closer to a detected obstacle.
Display in car with both front and rear sen-
sors. Reverse gear engaged, no front or
rear obstacle detected.
When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is
constant and the marked sensors' bar is fully
filled in, see figure (2). If the detected obstacle
is within the distance for the constant tone both
behind and in front of the car, then the tone
sounds alternately from the loudspeakers.
Park assist syst*
04
Rear parking assistance
G
0
1
7
8
3
3
The distance covered to the rear of the car is
about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for
obstacles behind comes from the rear loud-
speakers.
Rear parking assistance is activated when
reverse gear is engaged.
The system must be deactivated when revers-
ing with a trailer, or bike carrier on the towbar
or similar -otherwise they would trigger the
sensors.
NOTE
Rear parking assistance is deactivated
automatically when towing a trailer if Volvo
genuine trailer wiring is used.
Front parking assistance
G
0
2
1
4
2
4
The distance covered to the front of the car is
about 0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for
obstacles in front comes from the front loud-
speaker.
Front parking assistance is active at speeds up
to 15 km/h, and also during reversing. The sys-
tem is deactivated at a higher speed. However,
the lamp in the button remains illuminated in
order to indicate that the system is activated
for the next time the driver shall park. When the
speed is below 10 km/h the system is reacti-
vated.
NOTE
Front parking assistance is deactivated
when the parking brake is applied.
IMPORTANT
When fitting auxiliary lamps: Remember that
they must not obscure the sensors the
auxiliary lamps could then be detected as
obstacles.
Fault indicator
If the information symbol illuminates
with constant glow and the informa-
tion display shows Park assist syst Service
required then parking assistance is disen-
gaged.
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assistance
system may produce incorrect warning sig-
nals that are caused by external audio
sources that emit the same ultrasonic fre-
quencies that the system works with.
Examples of such sources include horns,
wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and
exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
Park assist syst*
04
Cleaning the sensors
Sensor location, front.
Sensor location, rear.
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
ensure that they work properly. Clean them
with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
cause incorrect warning signals.
BLIS* Blind Spot Information System
04
General information on BLIS
G
0
2
1
4
2
6
BLIS camera
Indicator lamp
BLIS symbol
BLIS is an information system based on cam-
era technology that under certain conditions
can help the driver to notice vehicles moving in
the same direction as the host vehicle in the so-
called "blind spot".
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS system components
must only be performed by a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
WARNING
The system is a supplement to, not a
replacement for, a safe driving style and use
of the rearview mirrors. It can never replace
the driver's attention and responsibility. The
responsibility for changing lanes safely
always rests with the driver.
The system is designed to work most effec-
tively when driving in dense traffic on multi-lane
highways.
When a camera has detected a vehicle
inside the blind spot zone the indicator lamp
illuminates with a constant glow.
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car
where the system has detected the vehicle.
If the car is overtaken on both sides at the
same time then both lamps illuminate.
BLIS advises the driver with a message if a fault
arises in the system. If for example the sys-
tem's cameras are obscured then the BLIS
indicator lamp flashes and a message is shown
on the information display. In such cases,
check and clean the lenses.
If necessary, the system can be switched off
temporarily by pressing the BLIS button once,
see page 184.
Blind spots
G
0
1
7
8
3
4
A = approx. 9.5 m and B = approx. 3 m
Button for activating/deactivating.
04
``
BLIS is activated when the engine is started.
The indicator lamps in the door panels flash
three times when BLIS is activated.
The system can be deactivated/activated
when the engine is started by pressing the
BLIS button.
When BLIS is deactivated the light in the button
goes out and a text message is shown on the
dashboard display.
When BLIS is activated the light in the button
illuminates, a new text message is shown on
the display and the indicator lamps in the door
panels flash three times. Press the READ but-
ton to clear the text message. For more infor-
mation on messages, see page 123.
When BLIS operates
The system operates when the car is driven at
a speed above 10 km/h.
Overtaking
The system is designed to react if:
you overtake another vehicle at a speed of
up to 10 km/h faster than the other vehicle
you are overtaken by a vehicle travelling up
to 70 km/h faster than you are travelling.
WARNING
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is revers-
ing.
A wide trailer coupled to the car can conceal
other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can pre-
vent the vehicle in the screened area from
being detected by BLIS.
Daylight and darkness
In daylight the system reacts to the shape of
the surrounding vehicles. The system is
designed to detect motor vehicles such as
cars, trucks, buses and motorcycles.
In darkness the system reacts to the head-
lamps of surrounding vehicles. If the head-
lamps of surrounding vehicles are not switched
on then the system does not detect the vehi-
cles. This means for example that the system
does not react to a trailer without headlamps
which is towed behind a car or truck.
WARNING
The system does not react to bicycles or
mopeds.
The BLIS cameras can be disrupted by
intensive light or when driving in the dark
when there are no light sources (e.g. street
lighting or other vehicles). The system may
then interpret the lack of light as if the cam-
eras have been blocked.
In both cases a message is shown in the
information display.
When driving in such conditions system
performance may be temporarily deterio-
rate and a text message is shown, see
page 185. If the message disappears auto-
matically then BLIS has returned to normal
functionality.
The BLIS cameras have limitations similar to
the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in
heavy snowfall or thick fog for example.
Cleaning
In order to work most effectively the BLIS cam-
era lenses must be clean. The lenses can be
cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge.
Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not
scratched.
04
IMPORTANT
The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice
or snow. If necessary, brush snow away
from the lenses.
Messages on the display
Blind-spot info
system ON
BLIS system on
Blind spot syst.
Service required
BLIS not function-
ing.
Contact a workshop
- an authorised
Volvo workshop is
recommended.
Blind spot syst.
Camera blocked
The BLIS camera is
blocked by dirt,
snow or ice. Clean
the lenses.
Blind spot syst.
Reduced function
The BLIS camera is
disrupted by fog or
strong sunlight shin-
ing directly into the
camera.
The camera resets
itself when the envi-
ronment has
returned to normal.
Blind-spot info
system OFF
BLIS system off
Limitations
In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp may
illuminate despite there being no other vehicle
within the blind spot.
NOTE
If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on iso-
lated occasions despite there being no
other vehicle within the blind spot then this
does not mean that a fault has arisen in the
system.
In the event of a fault in the BLIS system the
display shows the text Blind spot syst.
Service required.
Here are several examples of situations where
the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate even if
there is no other vehicle within the blind spot.
Reflection from shiny wet road surface.
Own shadow on large light smooth surface, e.g.
noise barrier or concrete road surface.
04
Low stationary sunlight shining into the camera.
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
04
188
Storage spaces
04
``
Storage compartment in door panel
Storage pocket* on front edge of front seat
cushions
Ticket clip
Glovebox
Storage compartment, cup holder
Jacket holder
Cup holder* in armrest, rear seat
Storage pocket
Jacket holder
The jacket holder is only designed for light
clothing.
Tunnel console
Storage compartment (e.g. for CD discs),
input for AUX and USB*
1
(e.g. iPod) under
the armrest (and storage tray*).
Includes cup holder for driver and passen-
ger as well as 12 V socket and small com-
partment. (If ashtray and cigarette lighter
are specified then there is a cigarette
lighter in the 12 V socket and a detachable
ashtray in the small compartment.)
Cigarette lighter and ashtray*
The ashtray in the tunnel console is detached
by lifting the tray straight up.
Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.
The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull
out the lighter and light a cigarette on the
heated coils.
Glovebox
The owner's manual and maps can be kept
here for example. There are also holders for
pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox can
be locked with the key blade, see page 43.
1
For RSE* the USB input is in a different location, see page 137.
04
Floor mats*
Volvo supplies specially manufactured floor
mats.
WARNING
The floor mat at the driver's seat must be
firmly fitted and secured in the attachment
clips to prevent it from being trapped
around and under the pedals.
Vanity mirror
G
0
2
1
4
3
8
Vanity mirror with lighting.
The lamp for the vanity mirror, on the driver's
side* and passenger side respectively, is
switched on automatically when the cover is
raised.
12 V socket
G
0
2
1
4
3
9
12 V socket in tunnel console, front seat.
G
0
2
1
4
4
0
12 V socket in tunnel console, rear seat.
The electrical socket can be used for 12 V
accessories, such as mobile phone chargers
and coolers. The maximum current is 10 A. For
the socket to supply current, the remote con-
trol key must be in at least key position I, see
page 71.
WARNING
Always leave the plug in the socket when
the socket is not in use.
Electrical socket in cargo area*
G
0
1
7
8
2
5
Fold down the cover to access the electrical
socket. It works even when the remote control
key is not in the ignition switch.
NOTE
Remember not to use the electrical socket
with the engine switched off because of the
risk of discharging the car's battery.
Bluetooth handsfree*
04
``
General
System overview.
Mobile phone
Microphone
Steering wheel keypad
Centre console
Bluetooth
TM
A mobile phone equipped with Bluetooth
TM
can be connected wirelessly to the audio sys-
tem. The audio system then works handsfree,
with the option to control a range of the mobile
phone's functions remotely. The mobile phone
can be operated by its own keys irrespective of
whether or not it is connected.
NOTE
Only a selection of mobile phones are fully
compatible with the handsfree function.
Volvo recommends that you seek assis-
tance from an authorised Volvo dealer or
www.volvocars.com for information on
compatible phones.
Phone functions, controls overview
Centre console control panel.
VOLUME Same functionality available in
steering wheel keypad.
Number and letter buttons
PHONE - On/off and standby mode
Navigation button
EXIT - End/refuse phone calls, clear
entered characters, interrupt current func-
tion. Same functionality available in steer-
ing wheel keypad.
ENTER Accept calls. A press of the but-
ton reveals latest dialled numbers. Same
functionality available in steering wheel
keypad.
Remember
The menus are controlled from the centre con-
sole and the steering wheel keypad. For gen-
eral information on menus, see page 120.
A short press on PHONE activates the hands-
free function. The text PHONE at the top of the
display shows that it is in phone mode. The
symbol shows that the handsfree func-
tion is active.
One long press on PHONE deactivates the
handsfree function and disconnects a con-
nected phone.
Connect mobile phone
A mobile phone is connected in different ways
depending on whether or not it has been con-
nected previously. To connect a mobile phone
for the first time, follow the instructions below:
04
Alternative 1 - via the car's menu system
1. Make the mobile phone detectable/visible
via Bluetooth
TM
, see mobile phone manual
or www.volvocars.com.
2. Activate the handsfree function with
PHONE.
> Menu option Add phone appears on
the display. If one or more mobile
phones have already been registered
then these are also shown.
3. Select Add phone.
> The audio system searches for mobile
phones in the vicinity. The search takes
approximately 30 seconds. The mobile
phones detected are specified with their
respective Bluetooth
TM
name in the dis-
play. The handsfree function's
Bluetooth
TM
name is shown in the
mobile phone such as My Car.
4. Choose one of the mobile phones in the
audio system display.
5. Enter the number series shown in the audio
system display via the mobile phone key-
pad.
Alternative 2 - via the phone's menu system
1. Activate the handsfree function with
PHONE. If there is a phone connected,
disconnect the connected phone.
2. Search with the phone's Bluetooth
TM
, see
the mobile phone manual.
3. Select My Car in the list of units detected
in your mobile phone.
4. Enter the PIN code '1234' into the mobile
phone when prompted for the PIN code.
5. Select to connect to My Car from the
mobile phone.
The mobile phone is registered and connected
automatically to the audio system while the text
Synchronising is shown in the display. For
more information on how mobile phones are
registered, see page 194.
When the connection is established the symbol
is shown and the mobile phone
Bluetooth
TM
name is shown in the display. Now
the mobile phone can be controlled from the
audio system.
To call
1. Make sure that the text PHONE is shown
at the top of the display and that the
symbol is visible.
2. Dial the number or use the phone book,
see page 194.
3. Press ENTER.
The call is interrupted with EXIT.
Disconnecting the mobile phone
Automatic disconnection takes place if the
mobile phone moves out of the audio system's
range. For more information on connection,
see page 194.
Manual disconnection takes place by deacti-
vating the handsfree function with one long
press on PHONE. The handsfree function is
also deactivated when the engine is switched
off or when a door is opened
1
.
When the mobile phone has been discon-
nected an ongoing call can be continued with
the mobile phone's built-in microphone and
speaker.
1
Only Keyless Drive.
04
``
NOTE
Some mobile phones require that the
changeover from handsfree is confirmed
from the phone's keypad.
Making and receiving calls
Incoming call
Calls are accepted with ENTER even if the
audio system is in CD or FM mode for example.
Refuse or end with EXIT.
Automatic answer
The automatic answer function means that
calls are accepted automatically.
Activate/deactivate under Phone settings
Call options Automatic answer.
In call menu
Press MENU or ENTER during an ongoing call
to access the following functions:
Mute microphone - audio system micro-
phone is muted.
Transfer call to mobile - the call is trans-
ferred to the mobile phone.
NOTE
With certain mobile phones the connection
is terminated when the privacy function is
used. This is normal. The handsfree function
asks if you want to reconnect.
Phone book searching in the phone
book.
NOTE
A new call cannot be started during an
ongoing call.
Audio settings
Phone call volume
The call volume can be regulated when the
handsfree function is in phone mode. Use the
steering wheel keypad or VOLUME.
Audio system volume
Providing there is no ongoing call taking place,
the audio system volume is controlled as usual
with VOLUME. In order to control audio system
volume during an ongoing call you have to
switch to one of the audio sources.
The audio source can be automatically muted
for incoming calls under Phone settings
Sounds and volume Mute radio.
Ring volume
Go to Phone settings Sounds and volume
Ring volume and adjust with / on the
navigation button.
Ring signals
The handsfree function has integrated ring sig-
nals that can be selected under Phone
settings Sounds and volume Ring
signals Ring signal 1, 2, 3 etc.
NOTE
The connected mobile phone's ring signal is
not deactivated when one of the handsfree
system's integrated signals is used.
In order to select the connected phone's ring
signal
2
, go to Phone settings Sounds and
volume Ring signals Use mobile
phone signal.
2
Not supported by all mobile phones.
04
More on registering and connecting
A maximum of five mobile phones can be reg-
istered. Registration is performed once per
phone. After registration the phone no longer
needs to be visible/detectable. A maximum of
one mobile phone can be connected at a time.
Phones can be deregistered under Bluetooth
Remove phone.
Automatic connection
When the handsfree function is active and the
last mobile phone connected is in range it is
connected automatically. When the audio sys-
tem searches for the last phone connected its
name is shown in the display. To change over
to manual connection of another phone, press
EXIT.
Manual connection
If you want to connect a mobile phone other
than the last connected or change the con-
nected mobile phone, proceed as follows:
1. Set the audio system in phone mode.
2. Press PHONE and select one of the
phones in the list.
The connection can also be made via the menu
system under Bluetooth Connect phone
or Change phone.
Phone book
All use of the phone book presupposes that the
text PHONE is shown at the top of the display
and that the symbol is visible.
The audio system stores a copy of the phone
book from each registered mobile phone. The
phone book is copied automatically to the
audio system during each connection.
Deactivate the function under Phone
settings Synchronise phone book.
Searching for contacts is only performed in
the connected mobile phone's phone
book.
NOTE
If the mobile phone does not support copy-
ing of the phone book then List is empty is
shown when copying is finished.
If the phone book contains a ringing caller's
contact information then this is shown in the
display.
Searching for contacts
The easiest way to search in the phone book is
with long presses on the keys 29. This starts
a search in the phone book based on the key's
first letter.
The phone book can also be reached with /
on the navigation button or with / on
the steering wheel keypad. The search can also
be performed from the phone book's Search
menu under Phone book Search:
1. Enter the first few letters of the contact and
press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.
2. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER to
call.
Voice recognition
The mobile phone's voice recognition function
for dialling can be used by holding in ENTER.
Voice mail number
Voice mail number can be changed under
Phone settings Call options Voice mail
number. If there is no number stored then this
menu can be reached with one long press on
1. Press 1 for a long time to use the stored
number.
Call lists
The call lists are copied to the handsfree func-
tion at each new connection and are then
updated during the connection. Press ENTER
to show the last dialled. Other call lists are
available under Call register.
04
NOTE
Certain mobile phones show a list of the last
dialled calls in reverse order.
Inputting text
Input text using the keypad in the centre con-
sole. Press once for the key's first character,
twice for the second etc. Continue pressing for
more characters, see the following table.
A short press on EXIT deletes an input char-
acter. One long press on EXIT clears all input
characters. / on the navigation button
scrolls between the characters.
Key Function
Space . 1 - ? ! , : " ' ( )
A B C 2
D E F 3
G H I 4
J K L 5
M N O 6
Key Function
P Q R S 7
T U V 8
W X Y Z 9
Pressed briefly if two characters
shall be entered after each other
with the same key.
+ 0 @ * # & $ / %
Shift between upper and lower
case letter
Built-in phone*
04
General
System overview.
Microphone
SIM card reader
Keypad, see page 137.
Control panel
Privacy handset
Safety
Engage a workshop to perform the service via
the phone. Volvo recommends that you seek
shop. The built-in phone must be switched off
during refuelling or in the vicinity of blasting
work. IDIS limits the menu system depending
on the speed of the car, see page 198.
Remember
SIM card
The phone can only be used with a valid SIM
card Subscriber Identity Module. For installa-
tion, see page 199. Emergency calls to emer-
gency numbers can be made without a SIM
card.
NOTE
The built-in phone cannot read 3G type SIM
cards. Combined 3G/GSM cards work.
Contact the network operator if the SIM
card needs to be changed.
Menus and controls
The menus are navigated using the control
panel and the steering wheel keypad.
For general information on menus, see
page 120. For information on the phone's con-
trols, see page 191.
On/Off
Switch on the phone with a short press on
PHONE. Enter the PIN code if necessary. The
symbol shows that the phone is switched
on. When this symbol is shown calls can be
received even if the CD menu for example is
shown in the display. Briefly press PHONE to
use the phone menus and to dial out. The text
PHONE shows that the phone menu is active.
Switch off the phone with one long press on
PHONE.
Making and receiving calls
Making calls
1. Switch on the phone.
2. If PHONE is not shown in the display,
briefly press PHONE.
3. Dial the number or use the phone book,
see page 197.
4. Press ENTER for handsfree calls or pick up
the privacy handset. Release the handset
by pulling it down.
Ending a call
End a call by pressing EXIT or by hanging up
the privacy handset.
Incoming call
Press ENTER for handsfree calls or pick up the
privacy handset. If the privacy handset is off
the hook when the phone rings then calls must
be received using ENTER.
End calls by pressing EXIT or by hanging up
the privacy handset. Refuse calls using EXIT.
Automatic answer
See page 193.
Built-in phone*
04
``
Call waiting
The function enables a new call to be answered
during an ongoing call. The new call is
answered as usual and the previous call is put
on hold.
Activate/deactivate under Phone settings
Call options Call waiting.
Automatic diversions
Incoming calls can be diverted automatically
depending on the type of call and situation.
Activate/deactivate under Call options
Diversions.
During a call
Press MENU or ENTER during a call to access
the In-call menu.
To call
1. Put the call on hold under Hold.
2. Dial the number of the third party or use the
Phone book menu option.
Switch between calls using the Swap menu
option.
Conference call
A conference call consists of several parties. It
can be initiated when a call is underway and
another is on hold. The Join menu option starts
the conference call.
All ongoing calls are disconnected if the con-
ference call is terminated.
Switching between the privacy handset
and handsfree
Switch from handsfree to the privacy handset
by picking up the privacy handset or selecting
in the menu.
Switch from the privacy handset to handsfree
using the Handsfree menu option.
Mute mode
Mute mode involves deactivating the micro-
phone, see page 196.
Activate/deactivate the microphone using
the Microphone On/Off menu option.
Audio settings
Phone call volume
The phone uses the front door speakers. Call
volume can be controlled when the text
PHONE is shown at the top of the display.
Use the steering wheel keypad or
VOLUME.
Audio system volume
See page 138.
Signals and volume
Change the ring signal under Phone settings
Sounds and volume Ring signals.
Activate/deactivate the message beep under
Phone settings Sounds and volume
Message beep.
Control the ring volume under Phone settings
Sounds and volume Ring volume.
Adjust using / on the navigation button.
Phone book
Contact information can be stored on the SIM
card or in the phone.
Storing contacts in the phone book
1. Press MENU and scroll to Phone book
New contact.
2. Enter a name and press ENTER. For infor-
mation on text input, see below.
3. Enter a number and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to SIM card or Phone memory and
press ENTER.
Inputting text
See page 195.
Searching for contacts
See page 194.
Built-in phone*
04
Erasing contacts
Erase a contact in the phone book by selecting
it and pressing ENTER. Then scroll to Erase
and press ENTER.
Erase all contacts under Phone book Erase
SIM or Erase phone.
Copying entries between the SIM card
and the phone book
Go to Phone book Copy all SIM to
phone or Phone to SIM and press ENTER.
Voice mail number
See page 194.
Other functions and settings
IDIS
IDIS (Intelligent Driver Information System)
can, in active driving situations, delay or refuse
ring signals from incoming calls. This way less
attention is distracted from driving.
IDIS is deactivated under Phone settings
IDIS.
Reading messages
1. Scroll to Messages Read and press
ENTER.
2. Scroll to a message and press ENTER.
3. The message text is shown in the display.
Additional selections can be made by
pressing ENTER.
Writing and sending messages
1. Scroll to Messages Write new and
press ENTER.
2. Enter text and press ENTER. For informa-
tion on text input, see page 195.
3. Scroll to Send and press ENTER.
4. Enter a phone number and press ENTER.
Message settings
Message settings are not normally changed.
The network provider has further information
on these settings. There are three options
under Messages Message settings:
SMSC number - Specifies the message
centre which will transfer the messages.
Validity time - Specifies how long the
message will be stored in the message
centre.
Message type.
Call lists
Lists of received, dialled and missed calls are
stored in Call register. Dialled calls are also
shown by pressing ENTER. The phone num-
bers in the lists can be saved in the phone
book.
Call duration
Call duration is stored under Call register
Call duration.
Reset the values under Call register

Call duration Reset timers.
Show/hide number for third party
The phone number can be temporarily hidden
under Call options Send my number.
IMEI number
In order to block a phone the network provider
must be advised of the phone's IMEI number.
Dial *#06# to show the number in the dis-
play. Write it down and keep it in a safe
place.
Network selection
The network can be selected either automati-
cally or manually under Phone settings
Network selection.
SIM code and security
The PIN code can protect the SIM card from
unauthorised use.
The code can be changed under Phone
settings Edit PIN code.
Change the security level under Phone
settings SIM security.
Built-in phone*
04
Select maximum security with the On option.
The code will then need to be entered each
time the phone is switched on.
Select the next highest security level with the
Automatic option. The phone then stores the
code and automatically specifies it when the
phone is switched on. When the SIM card is
used with another phone the code must be
entered manually.
Select minimum security with the Off option.
The SIM card can then be used without the
code at all.
Reset to factory settings
The phone settings are fully reset under Phone
settings Reset phone settings.
Installing the SIM card
G
0
2
1
4
5
0
G
0
2
1
4
5
1
Make sure that the phone is deactivated.
Pull out the SIM card holder which is
located in the glovebox.
Place the SIM card with the metal surface
visible and fit the cover on the SIM card
holder . Refit the SIM card holder.
Recommendations during driving......................................................... 202
Refuelling.............................................................................................. 204
Fuel....................................................................................................... 205
Loading................................................................................................. 208
Cargo area............................................................................................ 211
Warning triangle*................................................................................... 215
Driving with a trailer.............................................................................. 216
Towing and recovery............................................................................. 221
05
DURI NG YOUR JOURNEY
Recommendations during driving
05
General
Economical driving
Economical driving and reducing environmen-
tal impact result from driving gently with antic-
ipation and adapting your driving style and
speed to the current situation (for further
advice on how you can reduce environmental
impact, see page 9).
Do not let the engine idle, but drive at light
loads as soon as it is possible.
A cold engine consumes more fuel than a
warm one.
Do not drive with unnecessary loads in the
car.
Do not use winter tyres when the roads are
dry.
Remove the load carrier when it is not in
use.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather so
that the engine reaches its normal operat-
ing temperature more quickly.
Driving in water
The car can be driven through water at a maxi-
mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of
10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised
when passing through flowing water.
During driving in water, maintain a low speed
and do not stop the car. When the water has
been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly
and check that full brake function is achieved.
Water and mud for example can make the
brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake
function.
Clean the electric contacts of the electric
engine block heater and trailer coupling after
driving in water and mud.
Do not let the car stand with water over the sills
for any long period of time. This could cause
electrical malfunctions.
IMPORTANT
Engine damage can occur if water enters
the air filter.
In depths greater than 25 cm, water could
enter the transmission. This reduces the
lubricating ability of the oils and shortens
the service life of these systems.
In the event of the engine stalling in water,
do not try restart - tow the car from the water
to a workshop - an authorised Volvo work-
shop is recommended. Risk of engine
breakdown.
Engine and cooling system
Under special conditions, for example when
driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with
heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine and
cooling system will overheat. Proceed as fol-
lows to avoid overheating the engine:
Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep ascents.
Do not turn the engine off immediately you
stop after a hard drive.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to
operate for a while after the engine has been
switched off.
Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front
of the grille when driving in extreme high
temperatures.
Do not exceed engine speeds of
4500 rpm (3500 rpm for diesel engines) if
driving with a trailer or caravan in hilly ter-
rain. The oil temperature could become too
high.
Open tailgate
Avoid driving with the tailgate open. If it is how-
ever necessary, only drive for a short distance.
Close all windows, set the air distribution to the
windscreen and floor and run the fan at the
highest speed.
Recommendations during driving
05
203
WARNING
Do not drive with the tailgate open. Toxic
exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car
through the cargo area.
Do not overload the battery
The electrical functions in the car load the bat-
tery to varying degrees. Avoid using the ignition
position II when the engine is switched off. Use
ignition position I instead, as less power is con-
sumed.
Also, be aware of different accessories that
load the electrical system. Do not use functions
which use a lot of power when the engine is
switched off. Examples of functions that use a
lot of power:
ventilation fan
windscreen wiper
audio system (high volume)
parking lamps
If the battery voltage is low, a message appears
on the information display. The energy-saving
function shuts down certain functions or
reduces certain functions such as the ventila-
tion fan and audio system. Charge the battery
by starting the engine.
Before a long journey
Check that the engine is working normally
and that fuel consumption is normal.
Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil
or other fluid).
Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths.
Carrying a warning triangle is a legal
requirement in certain countries.
Winter driving
Check the following in particular before the
cold season:
The engine coolant must contain at least
50% glycol. This mixture protects the
engine down to approximately 35 C. To
achieve optimum antifreeze protection,
different types of glycol must not be mixed.
The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent
condensation.
Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate star-
ting in cold weather and also reduce fuel
consumption while the engine is cold. For
more information on suitable oils, see
page 280.
IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard
driving or in hot weather.
The condition of the battery and charge
level must be inspected. Cold weather pla-
ces great demands on the battery and its
capacity is reduced by the cold.
Use washer fluid to avoid ice forming in the
washer fluid reservoir.
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo rec-
ommends using winter tyres on all four wheels
if there is a risk of snow or ice.
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement
in certain countries. Studded tyres are not
permitted in certain countries.
Slippery driving conditions
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under
controlled conditions to learn how the car
reacts.
Refuelling
05
204
Refuelling
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
Open the fuel filler flap using the button on the
lighting panel. The filler flap is located on the
right-hand rear wing, as indicated by the sym-
bol's arrow in the information display.
Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in until a
click confirms that it is closed.
Opening/closing the fuel cap
WARNING!
AVERTISSEMENT!
ACHTUNG!
G
0
2
1
3
9
5
A certain overpressure may arise in the tank in
the event of high outside temperatures. Open
the cap slowly.
After refuelling, refit the cap and turn it until one
or more clicking sounds are heard.
Filling up with fuel
Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump
nozzle cuts out.
NOTE
Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot
weather.
Opening the fuel filler flap manually
The fuel filler flap can be opened manually
when electric opening from the passenger
compartment is not possible.
1. Open the side hatch in the cargo area
(same side as fuel filler flap).
2. Locate the green cord with handle.
3. Pull it straight back until the fuel filler flap
folds out with a "click".
Fuel
05
``
205
General information on fuel
Fuel of a lower quality than that recommended
by Volvo must not be used as engine power
and fuel consumption is negatively affected.
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel fumes and fuel
splashing in the eyes.
If fuel gets into your eyes, take out contact
lenses if worn and rinse your eyes with
plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and
seek medical attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol,
bioethanol and mixtures of the two, as well
as diesel, are highly toxic and could cause
permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed.
Seek medical attention immediately if fuel
has been swallowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be
ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star-
ting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone
when refuelling. The ring signal could cause
spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes,
leading to fire and injury.
IMPORTANT
Mixing different types of fuel or the use of
fuel not recommended invalidates Volvo's
guarantees, and any associated service
agreement. This applies to all engines.
NOTE: It does not apply to cars with engines
that are adapted to run on ethanol fuel (E85).
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi-
nation with fuel grade are factors that could
affect the car's performance.
Petrol
Petrol must meet the EN 228 standard. Most
engines can be run with octane ratings of 95
and 98 RON. 91 RON should only be used in
exceptional cases.
95 RON can be used for normal driving.
98 RON is recommended for optimum per-
formance and minimum fuel consumption.
When driving in temperatures above +38 C,
fuel with the highest possible octane rating is
recommended for optimum performance and
fuel economy.
IMPORTANT
Always refuel with unleaded petrol so as
not to damage the catalytic converter.
Do not use additives not recommended
by Volvo.
Catalytic converters
The purpose of the catalytic converters is to
purify exhaust gases. They are located close to
the engine so that operating temperature is
reached quickly.
The catalytic converters consist of a monolith
(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel
walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/rho-
dium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts,
i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chem-
ical reaction without being used up them-
selves.
Lambda-sond
TM
oxygen sensor
The Lambda-sond is part of a control system
intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel
economy.
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content
of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This
value is fed into an electronic system that con-
tinuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel
to air directed to the engine is continuously
adjusted. These adjustments create optimal
conditions for efficient combustion, and
Fuel
05
206
together with the three-way catalytic converter
reduce harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, car-
bon monoxide and nitrous oxides).
Bioethanol E85
Do not modify the fuel system or its compo-
nents, and do not replace components with
parts that are not specifically designed for use
with bioethanol.
WARNING
Methanol must not be used. A decal on the
inside of the fuel filler flap shows the correct
alternative fuel.
The use of components not designed for
bioethanol engines could cause fire, injury
or engine damage.
Reserve fuel can
The reserve fuel can should be filled with petrol,
see page 99.
WARNING
Ethanol is sensitive to sparks, and explosive
gases could form in the reserve fuel can if it
is refuelled with ethanol.
Diesel
Diesel must fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204
standards. Diesel engines are sensitive to con-
taminants, such as excessively high volumes
of sulphur particles for example. Only use die-
sel fuel from well-known producers. Never use
diesel of dubious quality.
At low temperatures (-6 C to -40 C), a paraffin
precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which
may lead to ignition problems. Special diesel
fuel designed for low temperatures around
freezing point is available from the major oil
companies. This fuel is less viscous at low tem-
peratures and reduces the risk of paraffin pre-
cipitate.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When
refuelling, check that the area around the fuel
filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the
paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter-
gent and water.
IMPORTANT
Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European
diesel standard.
The sulphur content must be a maximum of
50 ppm.
IMPORTANT
Diesel type fuels which must not be used:
Special additives
Marine Diesel Fuel
Fuel oil
RME
1
(Rape Methyl Ester) and vegeta-
ble oil.
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in
accordance with Volvo recommendations
and generate increased wear and engine
damage that is not covered by the Volvo
warranty.
Empty tank
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel star-
vation, the fuel system needs a few moments
to carry out a check. Proceed as follows before
starting the engine:
1. Add at least 5 litres of diesel to the fuel
tank.
2. Place the remote key in the ignition switch
and push it gently so that it is pulled in (see
page 71).
3. Press the START button without depress-
ing the brake and/or clutch pedal.
1
Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of RME, but further amounts must not be added.
Fuel
05
4. Wait approx. 1 minute.
5. To start the engine: Depress the brake and/
or clutch pedal and then press the
START button again.
Draining condensation from the fuel filter
The fuel filter separates condensation from the
fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine opera-
tion.
The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet
or if you suspect that the car has been filled
with contaminated fuel.
IMPORTANT
Certain special additives remove the water
separation in the fuel filter.
Diesel particle filter (DPF)
Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter,
which results in more efficient emission con-
trol. The particles in the exhaust gases are col-
lected in the filter during normal driving. So-
called "regeneration" is started in order to burn
away the particles and empty the filter. This
requires the engine to have reached normal
operating temperature.
Regeneration of the filter takes place automat-
ically at an interval of approximately
300-900 km depending on driving conditions.
Regeneration normally takes 10-20 minutes. It
may take a little longer at a low average speed.
Fuel consumption may increase slightly during
regeneration.
Regeneration in cold weather
If the car is frequently driven short distances in
cold weather then the engine does not reach
normal operating temperature. This means that
regeneration of the diesel particle filter does
not take place and the filter is not emptied.
When the filter has become approximately
80% full of particles, a warning triangle on the
instrument panel illuminates, and the message
Soot filter full. See manual is shown on the
instrument panel display.
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car
until the engine reaches normal operating tem-
perature, preferably on a main road or motor-
way. The car should then be driven for approx-
imately ca 20 minutes more.
When regeneration is complete the warning
text is cleared automatically.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that
the engine reaches normal operating tempera-
ture more quickly.
IMPORTANT
If the filter fills up with particles then it can
be difficult to start the engine and the filter
will be incapable of functioning. Then there
is a risk that the filter will have to be
replaced.
Fuel consumption and emissions of
carbon dioxide
Fuel consumption figures may change if the car
is equipped with extra equipment that affects
the car's weight. See information on weights
page 275 and table page 286.
The manner in which the car is driven, and
other non-technical factors can also affect fuel
consumption.
Consumption is higher and power output lower
for fuel with an octane rating of 91 RON.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, towing a trailer
or driving at high altitudes in combination
with fuel grade are factors that could affect
the car's performance.
Loading
05
208
General
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories reduces the car's payload by a
corresponding weight. For more detailed infor-
mation on weights, see page 275.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on the weight and distribution of
the load.
Loading the cargo area
The boot lid can be opened via a but-
ton on the lighting panel or the
remote control key, see page 51.
Position the load firmly against the back-
rest in front.
Put wide loads in the centre.
Heavy objects should be placed as low as
possible.
Cover sharp edges with something soft to
avoid damaging the upholstery.
Secure all loads to the load retaining eye-
lets with straps or web lashings.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a
frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry
the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.
Always secure the load.
WARNING
The protection provided by the inflatable
curtain in the headlining may be compro-
mised or eliminated by high loads. Never
load cargo above the backrest. During
heavy braking the load may otherwise shift,
causing injury to the car's occupants.
WARNING
Always secure the load. During heavy brak-
ing the load may otherwise shift, causing
injury to the car's occupants.
Protect sharp edges with something soft.
Turn off the engine and apply the parking
brake when loading or unloading long
objects. Otherwise you may accidentally
knock the gear lever or gear selector with
the load and cause a gear to engage and the
car to move off.
Lowering the rear seat backrest
To simplify loading in the cargo area, the rear
seats of the car can be folded down, see
page 75.
Securing loads
On both sides of the cargo area there are sev-
eral mounting points designed for securing
loads. They are located in the floor and in the
top edge of both sides of the cargo area.
WARNING
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects that are
loose or protrude could cause injury during
heavy braking.
Always secure large and heavy objects with
a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
Loading
05
``
209
Floor rails
Load secured in both upper and lower mounting
points.
In the floor of the cargo area there are two rails
with movable cargo retaining hooks for secur-
ing items in the cargo area using cargo retain-
ing straps.
IMPORTANT
Do not use other adjustable straps as these
could pull and break the mounting points.
Cleaning
Dirt and objects collecting down in the rails
could hinder the repositioning, locking, raising
and removal of the cargo retaining hooks.
Make it a habit to clean the tracks with a vac-
uum cleaner and a lightly-moistened soft cloth.
Cargo retaining straps
G
0
1
9
3
9
7
Strap retention.
One loop of the cargo retaining strap around
one of the cargo retaining hooks secures the
strap and prevents it from sliding around the
hook.
NOTE
A suitable width for a cargo retaining strap
is approx. 25 mm.
Moving a cargo retaining hook
G
0
1
7
7
4
2
Fold the cargo retaining hook down in the
direction to which its opening points.
Press the hook down lightly and at the
same time push it to the required position.
Fold the hook up it is self-locking.
NOTE
There must be at least 50 cm between the
cargo retaining hooks in the rail.
Loading
05
210
Removing a cargo retaining hook
G
0
1
8
1
3
4
The cargo retaining hooks can be easily
removed from the rail, e.g. for cleaning the bot-
tom of the rail.
Fold the cargo retaining hook down in the
direction to which its opening points.
Press the hook down lightly and at the
same time slide it to the cut-out opening.
Lift the hook straight up.
Securing the hook takes place in reverse order.
NOTE
A removed hook must be pressed down
lightly at the same time in order to enable its
reinsertion into the rail.
Cargo retaining hook correctly fitted/
incorrectly fitted
G
0
1
9
5
8
1
Fit the cargo retaining hooks correctly!
It is important that the cargo retaining hooks
are fitted correctly. The hooks' openings must
point away from each other.
WARNING
Fit the cargo retaining hooks correctly. Oth-
erwise the cargo retaining strap will move
the cargo retaining hook down so that it
loosens and the strap slides off.
Cargo area
05
``
Bag holder*
G
0
1
7
7
4
5
Bag holder under folding hatch in the floor.
The bag holder keeps carrier bags in place and
prevents them from overturning and spreading
their contents across the cargo area.
1. Open the hatch that is part of the floor in
the cargo area.
2. Tension and secure the carrier bags using
the strap.
Safety net*
G
0
2
4
6
2
8
Storage space, safety net cassettes.
A rollable safety net comprising two cassettes
has a storage space under the cargo area floor
hatch.
Securing the net cassettes
The two-part safety net cassette is secured on
the rear of the backrest. The narrowest cas-
sette is secured on the left-hand side (seen
from the tailgate).
1. Fold the rear seat's backrest forward.
2. Align the cassette's anchor rails in front of
the backrest attachment lugs .
3. Slide the cassette into the attachment lugs
.
4. Fold back and lock the backrests.
Removing the cassettes takes place in reverse
order
Using the safety net
G
0
1
8
2
4
6
Pull the net up from the cassettes. The net is
self-locking after about 1 minute if the rear
seat's backrests are raised.
Cargo area
05
Pull up the right-hand section of the net
using its strap.
Insert the rod in the mounting on the right-
hand side and then press it forward the
rod locks in with a click.
Pull out the rod's telescope section and
click it in on the other side.
Pull up the left-hand safety net and hook it
into the rod.
Folding up takes place in reverse order.
The net can also be used when the rear seat's
backrest is folded forward.
Removing the net cassettes
1. Roll the safety nets into the cassettes in
accordance with the procedure in the sec-
tion entitled "Using the safety net", but in
reverse.
2. Fold the whole backrest forward.
3. Slide the cassettes out until they loosen
from the anchor rails.
Store the cassettes in their compartment under
the cargo area floor hatch.
WARNING
Loads in the cargo area must be firmly
secured, even if the safety net is correctly
fitted.
Safety net combined with cargo cover
G
0
1
8
2
4
7
Puller-straps for raising the net.
The safety net can also be raised from the rear
seat when the cargo cover is extended.
Follow the procedure in the section entitled
"Using the safety net". The straps for raising
are located by the arrows.
Safety grille*
G
0
1
7
7
4
8
A protective grille prevents cargo from being
thrown forward in the passenger compartment
in the event of heavy braking. For safety rea-
sons, the grille must always be mounted and
secured correctly.
Folding up
Take hold of the bottom of the safety grille and
pull back/up.
IMPORTANT
The safety grille cannot be folded up or
down when a cargo cover is fitted.
Cargo area
05
``
Installation
G
0
1
8
3
6
7
G
0
1
8
3
6
8
G
0
1
8
3
6
9
NOTE
The safety grille is most easily fitted and
removed by two people via the rear doors.
When fitting, the handle, see
illustration , must be on the front of
the grille.
The backrests must be lowered to allow the
safety grille to be fitted, see page 75.
Position the handle in fitting position, see
illustration. Press gently on the handle to
enable it to be turned into position, see
arrow.
Press the strut in towards the grille and
align the grille in the roof mounting.
Turn the handle 90 . Press gently as
illustrated if necessary. Secure the grille
by angling the handle 90 .
Removal
Removal of the grille takes place in reverse
order to the description in the previous section
entitled "Installation".
Cargo cover*
G
0
1
7
7
4
9
Pull the cargo cover over the load and hook it
into the holes by the rear pillars in the cargo
area.
IMPORTANT
The safety grille cannot be folded up or
down when the cargo cover is fitted.
Fitting the cargo cover
Move one end piece of the cover into the
recess on the side panel.
Move the other end piece into the corres-
ponding recess.
Press both sides in. A "click" should be
audible and the red marking should disap-
pear.
Cargo area
05
214
> Check that both end pieces are locked.
Removing the cargo cover
1. Press in one end piece button and lift it out.
2. Carefully angle the cover up/out and the
other end piece loosens automatically.
Lowering the cargo cover's rear sealing
disc
In its rolled-in position, the cargo cover's rear
sealing disc protrudes horizontally into the
cargo area when it is fitted.
Pull the sealing disc back gently, free from
its support shelves, and lower.
Long load
The passenger seat backrest can also be
folded for an extra long load, see page 73.
Roof load
Using load carriers
To avoid damaging the car and for maximum
possible safety while driving, the load carriers
designed by Volvo are recommended.
Carefully follow the installation instructions
supplied with the carriers.
Check periodically that the load carriers
and load are properly secured. Lash the
load securely with retaining straps.
Distribute the load evenly over the load
carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the
bottom.
The size of the area exposed to the wind,
and therefore fuel consumption, increase
with the size of the load.
Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,
heavy braking and hard cornering.
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving cha-
racteristics are altered by roof loads.
For information on maximum permitted roof
load, including load carriers and any space
box, see page 275.
Warning triangle*
05
G
0
1
7
9
5
6
Lift the floor mat and take out the warning
triangle.
Take the warning triangle from the case,
fold out and assemble the two loose sides.
Fold out the warning triangle's support
legs.
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning
triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suit-
able place with regard to traffic.
Ensure the warning triangle and its case are
properly secured in the cargo area after use.
NOTE
If the floor hatch is not closed then privacy
locking does not work, see page 45.
First aid*
G
0
1
8
2
5
3
A case with first aid equipment is located under
the floor in the cargo area.
Driving with a trailer
05
216
General
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's
payload by a corresponding weight. For more
detailed information on weights, see
page 275.
If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo, then
the car is delivered with the necessary equip-
ment for driving with a trailer.
The car's towing bracket must be of an
approved type.
If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your
Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped
for driving with a trailer.
Distribute the load on the trailer so that the
weight on the towing bracket complies
with the specified maximum towball load.
Increase the tyre pressure to the recom-
mended pressure for a full load. For tyre
pressure label location, see page 261.
Clean the towing bracket regularly and
grease the towball.
Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
brand new. Wait until it has been driven at
least 1000 km.
The brakes are loaded much more than
usual on long and steep downhill slopes.
Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your
speed.
The engine is loaded more heavily than
usual when driving with a trailer.
If the car is driven with a heavy load in a hot
climate, the engine may overheat. If the
temperature in the engine's cooling system
is too high the warning symbol is illumi-
nated and the information display shows
High engine temp Stop safely. Stop the
car in a safe way and allow the engine to
run at idling speed for several minutes and
cool down. If High engine temp Stop
engine or Coolant level low, Stop
engine are shown then the engine must be
switched off after stopping the car.
The automatic gearbox has a built-in pro-
tection system that engages in the event of
overheating. If the temperature in the gear-
box is too high the warning symbol is illu-
minated and the information display shows
Transmission hot Reduce speed or
Transmission hot Stop safely. Follow
the instructions and reduce speed or stop
the car in a safe way and allow the engine
to run at idling speed for several minutes to
enable the gearbox to cool down. In the
event of overheating the car's air condi-
tioning may be temporarily switched off.
In the interests of safety, you should
restrict speed to 80 km/h, even if the laws
of certain countries allow for higher
speeds.
Move the gear selector to position P when
parking an automatic car with a hitched
trailer. Always use the parking brake. Block
the wheels with chocks when parking a car
with hitched trailer on a hill.
Trailer cable
An adapter is required if the car's towing
bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has
7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved
by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag
on the ground.
Direction indicators and brake lights on
the trailer
If any of the trailer's lamps for direction indica-
tors are broken, then the combined instrument
panel's symbol for direction indicators flashes
faster than normal and the display shows the
text Bulb fail - Ind. signal trailer.
If any of the trailer's lamps for the brake light
are broken then the Bulb fail - Stop lamp
trailer text is shown.
Automatic gearbox
Parking on a hill
1. Activate the parking brake.
2. Move the gear selector to position P.
Starting on a hill
1. Move the gear selector to position D.
2. Release the parking brake.
05
``
217
Steep inclines
Do not use a higher manual gear than the
engine can "handle". It is not always eco-
nomical to drive in high gears.
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of
more than 12%.
Level control
The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant
height irrespective of the car's load (up to the
maximum permissible weight). When the car is
stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly,
which is normal.
Trailer weights
National vehicle regulations can limit trailer
weights and speeds. The towbar can be certi-
fied for a higher towing weight than the car can
actually tow. For Volvo's permitted trailer
weights, see page 277.
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for
trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer
may be difficult to control in the event of
sudden movement and braking.
Towing bracket
If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar,
the towball mounting instructions must be fol-
lowed carefully, see page 218.
WARNING
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable
towbar:
Follow the assembly instructions for the
towball section carefully.
The towball section must be locked with
the key before setting off.
Check that the indicator window shows
green.
Important checks
The towball section's towball must be
cleaned and greased regularly.
NOTE
If a towball hitch with vibration damper is
used, it is not necessary to grease the tow-
ball.
Storing the towball section
G
0
3
1
1
2
1
Towball section storage location.
IMPORTANT
Always remove the towball section after use
and store it in the appointed location in the
car, firmly fastened with its strap.
05
218
Specifications
G
0
2
1
4
8
5
B
A
G
0
2
6
0
8
0
F
H
E G
C
D
G
0
1
7
9
7
1
Dimensions, mounting points (mm)
A (V70) 1129
A (XC70) 1113
B (V70) 93
B (XC70) 77
C 855
D 428
E 112
F 346
G Side member
H Ball centre
Installing the towball
G
0
1
8
9
2
8
Remove the protective cover by first press-
ing in the catch and then pulling the
cover straight back .
G
0
2
1
4
8
7
Ensure that the mechanism is in the
unlocked position by turning the key clock-
wise.
05
``
219
G
0
2
1
4
8
8
The indicator window must show red.
G
0
2
1
4
8
9
Insert the towball section until you hear a
click.
G
0
2
1
4
9
0
The indicator window must show green.
G
0
0
0
0
0
0
Turn the key anticlockwise to locked posi-
tion. Remove the key from the lock.
G
0
2
1
4
9
4
Check that the towball section is secure by
pulling it up, down and back.
WARNING
If the towball section is not fitted correctly
then it must be removed and refitted in
accordance with the previous instructions.
IMPORTANT
Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch,
the remainder of the towball section should
be clean and dry.
05
220
G
0
2
1
4
9
5
Safety cable.
WARNING
Be sure to attach the trailer's safety cable to
the correct place.
Removing the towball
Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the
unlocked position.
Push in the locking wheel and turn it
anticlockwise until you hear a click.
Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it
comes to a stop. Hold it in this position
while pulling the towball rearward and
upward.
WARNING
Secure the towbar's loose towball safely if
it is stored in the car, see page 217.
G
0
1
8
9
2
9
Push the protective cover until it snaps
tight.
Towing and recovery
05
``
221
Towing
Find out the highest legal speed for towing
before towing the car.
1. Press the remote control key into the igni-
tion switch to unlock the steering lock so
that the car can be steered, see page 71.
2. The remote control key must remain in the
ignition switch while the car is being towed.
3. Ensure the towrope is always taut by gently
depressing the brake pedal to avoid violent
jerks.
4. Be prepared to brake to stop.
WARNING
Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch to unlock the steering lock (so that
the car can be steered) before towing.
WARNING
The steering lock remains in the position it
was in when the power was cut off. The
steering lock must be unlocked before tow-
ing. The remote control key must be in key
position II. Never remove the remote control
key from the ignition switch while driving or
when the car is being towed.
WARNING
The brake servo and power steering do not
work when the engine is switched off. The
brake pedal must be pressed about five
times harder than normal, and the steering
will be considerably heavier than normal.
Manual gearbox
Move gear lever into neutral and release
the parking brake.
Automatic gearbox
Move the gear selector to position N and
release the parking brake.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be towed with
the wheels rolling forward.
Cars with automatic gearbox must not
be towed at speeds above 80 km/h or
further than 80 km.
2.0
2.0 with automatic transmission should not be
towed. As the transmission fluid cannot be
maintained at the correct operating tempera-
ture by the engine-driven circulation pump the
risk of damage to the transmission is great.
However, the car can be towed for a short dis-
tance at low speed to move it from a dangerous
position - not further than 30 km and not faster
than 30 km/h.
IMPORTANT
Towing at temperatures below freezing
point is strongly advised against.
Jump starting
Do not tow the car to bump start it. Use a donor
battery if the battery is discharged to the extent
that the engine does not start, see page 101.
IMPORTANT
Bump starting the car can damage the cat-
alytic converter.
Towing eye
Use the towing eye if the car needs to be towed
on the road. The towing eye is attached in the
recess on the right-hand side of the front or
rear bumper.
After use, unscrew the towing eye and put it
back in its storage space.
Towing and recovery
05
222
Fitting the towing eye
G
0
1
7
4
6
4
Take out the towing eye that is located
under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
G
0
2
1
5
0
1
For the V70: Press the marked edge of the
cover into the bumper and release. Fold
aside the cover and screw in the towing
eye firmly, right in up to the flange.
For the XC70: Release the bottom edge of
the cover on the bumper with a screwdriver
or coin. Screw in the towing eye firmly, right
in up to the flange. Use the wheel wrench
to tighten the towing eye.
NOTE
On certain cars with fitted towbar the towing
eye cannot be secured in the rear mounting.
In which case, secure the tow rope in the
towbar.
For this reason it is advisable to store a
detachable towbar towball in the car.
Recovery
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be towed with
the wheels rolling forward.
An all-wheel drive car (AWD) with raised
front suspension must not be towed at
speeds above 70 km/h. It should not be
towed further than 50 km.
WARNING
The towing eye is only designed for towing
on roads - not for recovering the car. Call a
recovery service for recovery assistance.
05
223
G
0
2
0
9
2
2
224
Engine compartment............................................................................. 226
Lamps................................................................................................... 232
Wiper blades and washer fluid.............................................................. 239
Battery................................................................................................... 241
Fuses..................................................................................................... 244
Wheels and tyres.................................................................................. 252
Car care................................................................................................ 265
06
MAI NTENANCE AND SERVI CE
Engine compartment
06
226
General
Volvo service programme
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi-
ble, follow the Volvo service programme as
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised
Volvo workshop to perform the service and
maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the
personnel, special tools and service literature
to guarantee the highest quality of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Check regularly
Check the following oils and fluids at regular
intervals, e.g. when refuelling:
Coolant
Engine oil
Power steering fluid
Washer fluid
WARNING
Bear in mind that the radiator fan may start
automatically some time after the engine
has been switched off.
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-
shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is
hot.
Raising the car
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
belongs to the car model in question. If a
jack other than one recommended by Volvo
is selected, then follow the instructions
included with the equipment
If the car is raised with a workshop jack; posi-
tion the jack against the front edge on the
engine's subframe.
Do not damage the splashguard under the
engine. Ensure that the workshop jack is posi-
tioned so that the car cannot slide off the jack.
Always use axle stands or similar.
If you raise the car using a two-pillar workshop
lift, ensure that the front and rear lift arms are
fixed under the lifting points on the door sill.
See preceding illustration.
Opening and closing the bonnet
Engine compartment
06
``
227
G
0
1
0
9
5
1
Pull the handle by the pedals. You will hear
when the catch releases.
Move the catch to the left and open the
bonnet. (The catch hook is located
between the headlamp and grille, see illus-
tration.)
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when
closed.
Engine compartment, overview
G
0
1
8
9
4
5
The appearance of the engine compartment may
vary depending on engine variant.
Coolant expansion tank
Power steering fluid reservoir
Engine oil dipstick
Radiator
Filler opening for engine oil
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand
drive)
Battery
Relay and fuse box, engine compartment
Filling washer fluid
Air filter
WARNING
High voltage output from the ignition sys-
tem. The voltage in the ignition system is
highly dangerous. The remote control key
must therefore always be in position 0 dur-
ing work in the engine compartment, see
page 71.
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coils
when the remote control key is in ignition
position II or when the engine is hot.
Checking the engine oil
G
0
2
1
7
3
3
Label for oil grade.
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
When driving under adverse conditions, see
page 283
Engine compartment
06
228
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard to
service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact. An
approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals can
be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of
oil (see the engine compartment decal) for
both filling and oil change, otherwise you
will risk affecting service life, starting cha-
racteristics, fuel consumption and environ-
mental impact. Volvo Car Corporation dis-
claims all warranty liability if engine oil of the
prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo uses different systems for warning of low
oil level or low oil pressure. Certain variants
have an oil pressure sensor, and then the lamp
for oil pressure is used. Other variants have an
oil level sensor, and then the driver is informed
via the warning symbol in the centre of the
instrument unit as well as by display texts. Cer-
tain models have both variants. Contact a
Volvo dealer for more information.
Filling and dipstick
G
0
2
1
7
3
4
Dipstick, petrol engines.
G
0
2
1
7
3
6
Dipstick, diesel engines.
Change in accordance with the intervals speci-
fied in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
IMPORTANT
When filling oil to top up, the oil being filled
must have the same grade, see page 283.
Checking the oil level in a new car is especially
important before the first scheduled oil change.
The most accurate measurements are made on
a cold engine before starting. The measure-
ment will be inaccurate if taken immediately
after the engine is switched off. The dipstick
will indicate that the level is too low because
the oil has not had time to flow down into the
oil sump.
G
0
2
1
7
3
7
The oil level must be within the area marked on the
dipstick.
Park the car on a level surface, switch off the
engine and wait 10-15 minutes to allow the oil
Engine compartment
06
``
229
time to run back to the sump. For capacities,
see page 283 and onwards.
Checking with a cold engine
1. Wipe the dipstick clean.
2. Check the level using the dipstick. It must
be between the MIN and MAX marks.
3. If the level is close to the MIN mark, start
by topping up with 0.5 litres of oil. Top up
until the level is nearer to MAX than MIN
on the dipstick.
IMPORTANT
Never fill above the MAX mark. Oil con-
sumption may increase if too much oil is
poured into the engine.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold
due to the risk of fire.
Checking with a warm engine
1. Wipe the dipstick clean.
2. Check the oil level using the dipstick.
3. If the level is close to the MIN mark, start
by topping up with 0.5 litres of oil. Top up
until the level is nearer to MAX than MIN
on the dipstick.
Coolant
Checking and topping up the coolant
When topping up the coolant, follow the
instructions on the packaging. It is important
that the mixture of coolant concentrate and
water is correct for the prevailing weather con-
ditions. Never top up with water only. The risk
of freezing increases with both too little and too
much coolant concentrate. For capacities, see
page 283.
IMPORTANT
A high content of chlorine, chlorides
and other salts may cause corrosion in
the cooling system.
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion
agent as recommended by Volvo.
Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50%
water and 50% coolant.
Mix the coolant with approved quality
tap water. In the event of any doubt
about water quality, used ready-mixed
coolant in accordance with Volvo rec-
ommendations.
When changing coolant/replacing cool-
ing system components, flush the cool-
ing system clean with approved quality
tap water or flush with ready-mixed
coolant.
The engine must only be run with a well-
filled cooling system. High tempera-
tures can occur, causing a risk of dam-
age (cracks) to the cylinder head.
For capacities and for standards regarding
water quality, see page 283.
Check the coolant regularly
The level must lie between the MIN and MAX
marks on the expansion tank. If the system is
Engine compartment
06
230
not filled sufficiently, high temperatures could
occur, causing a risk of damage to the engine.
WARNING
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant
requires topping up when the engine is at
operating temperature, unscrew the expan-
sion tank cap slowly to gently release the
overpressure.
Brake and clutch fluid
Checking the level
Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser-
voir. The level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks that are visible inside the reservoir.
Check the level regularly.
Change the brake fluid every other year or at
every other regular service.
For capacities and recommended fluid grade,
see page 283. The fluid should be changed
annually on cars driven in conditions requiring
hard, frequent braking, such as driving in
mountains or tropical climates with high
humidity.
WARNING
before topping up the brake fluid. Volvo rec-
ommends that the reason for the loss of
brake fluid is investigated by an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Filling
The fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side
The fluid reservoir is protected under the cover
over the cold section in the engine compart-
ment. The round cover must be removed first
before the reservoir cap can be reached.
1. Turn and open the cover located on the
covering.
2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid.
The level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks, which are located on the
inside of the reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Do not forget to refit the cap.
Power steering fluid
IMPORTANT
Keep the area around the power steering
fluid reservoir clean when checking.
Check the level frequently. The fluid does not
require changing. The fluid level must be
Engine compartment
06
231
between the MIN and MAX marks. For capaci-
ties and recommended fluid grade, see
page 283.
NOTE
If a fault should arise in the power steering
system or if the engine is switched off and
the car must be towed, it can still be steered.
Lamps
06
232
General
All bulbs are specified, see page 237. Bulbs
and spotlights that are of a special type or that
are only suitable for replacement by a work-
shop are:
General interior lighting in the roof, reading
lamps
Glovebox lighting
Direction indicators, door mirror
Approach lighting
Brake light, fog lamp, reversing lamp
Rear side position lamps, position lamps
Xenon, Active Xenon lamps
LED lamps, general
WARNING
On cars with Dual Xenon headlamps, Dual
Xenon lamp replacement must be carried
out at a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. The headlamps
must be handled with extreme caution due
to the Dual Xenon lamp's high-voltage unit.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease and oils from your fin-
gers are vaporised by the heat, coating the
reflector and then causing damage.
Front lamp housing
G
0
1
0
3
2
5
All front bulbs (except those for fog lamps) are
replaced by first removing the whole lamp
housing from the engine compartment.
WARNING
Always switch off the ignition and remove
the remote control key before starting to
replace a bulb.
Removing the headlamp
1. Press quickly on the START-/STOP
ENGINE button and remove the remote
control key.
2. (Upper illustration)
Withdraw the lamp housing's locking
pins.
Pull the lamp housing straight forward.
IMPORTANT
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the con-
nector
3. (Lower illustration)
Detach the lamp housing connector by
pressing down the clip with your thumb.
At the same time, guide out the con-
nector with your other hand.
4. Lift out the lamp housing and place it on a
soft surface to avoid scratching the lens.
5. Replace the bulb in question, see
page 237.
Installing the headlamp
1. Plug in the connector, a clicking sound
should be heard.
Lamps
06
``
233
2. Reinstall the lamp housing and locking
pins. Check that they are correctly
inserted.
3. Check the lighting.
The lamp housing must be plugged in and
installed before the lighting is switched on or
the remote control key is inserted into the igni-
tion switch.
Removing the cover
G
0
2
1
7
4
5
Before starting to replace a bulb, see
page 232.
1. Open the lock clamp by pressing up/out.
2. Press down the clips on the cover and
remove it.
Reinstall the cover in reverse order.
Dipped beam, halogen
G
0
2
1
7
4
6
1. Detach the headlamp.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Detach the bulb by pressing the holder
downwards.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
5. Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap it
in. It can only be secured in one position.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Main beam, Halogen
G
0
2
1
7
4
7
2. Remove the cover.
3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise
and then pulling straight out
5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socket
and turn clockwise in order to secure it. It
can only be secured in one position.
Lamps
06
Extra main beam, Xenon*
G
0
2
1
7
4
8
2. Remove the cover, see page 233.
3. Detach the bulb by pressing the holder
downwards.
5. Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap it
in. It can only be secured in one position.
G
0
2
1
7
4
9
2. Remove the cover, see page 233.
3. For better access, detach the main beam
bulb first.
4. Pull the cable in order to withdraw the bulb
holder.
5. Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one.
It can only be secured in one position.
6. Fit the bulb holder in the socket and press
until a clicking sound is heard.
Direction indicators/flashers
G
0
2
1
7
5
0
2. Remove the small round cover.
3. Pull the bulb holder in order to extract the
bulb.
It can only be installed in one way.
6. Refit the cover. It must be fitted and
pressed in until a clicking sound is heard.
Lamps
06
``
235
Side marker lamps
G
0
2
1
7
5
1
page 232.
2. Remove the small round cover.
3. Pull the cable in order to withdraw the bulb
holder.
It can only be installed in one way.
6. Refit the cover. It must be fitted and
pressed in until a clicking sound is heard.
Front fog lamps
1. Remove the cover by pressing in the 4 clips
with a thin blade and pulling straight out.
2. Unscrew the lamp housing screw and pull
it out.
3. Turn the bulb anticlockwise and remove it.
4. Fit a new bulb by turning clockwise.
5. Refit the bulb. (The profile of the bulb
holder corresponds to the profile of the
foot of the bulb).
6. Refit the bulb holder. The TOP mark on the
bulb holder must always be upward.
Lamp housing, rear, direction
indicators
G
0
1
7
4
5
6
The direction indictor bulb in the rear lamp
cluster is replaced from inside the cargo area.
1. Open the panel.
2. Remove the insulation by pulling it straight
out.
3. Loosen the whole of the lamp by turning its
handle anticlockwise.
4. Detach the bulb by pulling it straight out.
Lamps
06
236
NOTE
If the error message remains after a faulty
bulb has been replaced then we recom-
mend that you visit an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Location of rear bulbs
G
0
1
7
4
5
7
Lamp lens, right-hand side
Position lamps/brake light (LED)
Side position lights, SML (LED)
Direction indicators
Reflector, rear
Rear fog lamp (one side)
Reversing lamp
Brake light (LED)
Brake light (LED)
Number plate lighting
G
0
1
7
4
5
8
1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.
2. Carefully detach the entire lamp housing
and withdraw it.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Refit the entire lamp housing and screw it
into place.
Courtesy lighting
G
0
2
1
7
5
7
page 232.
1. Insert a screwdriver at the short end of the
lens closest to the tunnel console and turn
gently so that the lens comes loose.
(Applies to both lamps).
2. Turn carefully until the lens comes loose.
4. Refit the lens.
Lamps
06
``
237
Lighting, cargo area
G
0
3
1
9
4
2
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently prize so
that the lamp housing comes loose.
3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press
back the lamp housing.
Vanity mirror lighting
Removing the mirror glass
G
0
2
1
7
5
9
1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower
edge, in the centre. Carefully prize up the
lug on the edge.
2. Insert the screwdriver underneath the edge
on the left and right-hand sides (by the
black rubber sections), and prize carefully
so that the glass comes loose in the lower
edge.
3. Carefully detach and lift aside the entire
mirror glass and cover.
Fitting the mirror glass
1. Press the three lugs at top edge of the mir-
ror glass back into position.
2. Then press the three lower lugs back into
position.
Specification, bulbs
Lighting W Type
Extra main beam,
Xenon, ABL
55 H7
Dipped beam, hal-
ogen
55 H7
Main beam, Halo-
gen
65 H9
Front direction
indicators
21 H21W
Direction indica-
tors, rear
21 PY21W
Front fog lamps 35 H8
Courtesy lighting,
cargo area lighting,
number plate light-
ing
5 Tubular
lamp
SV8.5
Vanity mirror 1.2 Tubular
lamp
SV5.5
Lamps
06
238
Lighting W Type
Front position and
parking lamps
5 W5W
Front side marker
lamps
5 W5W
Glovebox lighting 5 Tubular
lamp
SV8.5
Wiper blades and washer fluid
06
``
239
Wiper blades
Service position
In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades
(for scraping off ice from the windscreen) they
must be in service position.
1. Turn the remote control key to position 0,
see page 71, and keep the remote control
key in the ignition switch.
2. Move the right-hand stalk switch up for
about 1 second. The wipers then move to
standing straight up.
The wipers return to the starting position when
the car is started.
Replacing the wiper blades
Turn up the wiper arm. Press the button
located on the wiper blade mounting and
pull straight out parallel with the wiper arm.
Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click"
is heard.
Check that the blade is firmly installed.
G
0
2
1
7
6
3
NOTE
The wiper blades are different lengths. The
blade on the driver's side is longer than the
blade on the passenger side.
Wiper blades and washer fluid
06
240
Replacing the wiper blades, rear window
G
0
3
2
7
7
0
1. Fold out the wiper arm.
2. Grip the inner section of the blade (by the
arrow).
3. Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's end
position against the wiper arm as a lever to
detach the blade more easily.
4. Press the new wiper blade into position.
Check that it is firmly installed.
5. Lower the wiper arm.
Cleaning
For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see
page 265.
IMPORTANT
Check the wiper blades regularly.
Neglected maintenance shortens the serv-
ice life of the wiper blades.
Filling washer fluid
The windscreen and headlamp washers share
a common reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Add washer antifreeze during the winter so
that the fluid does not freeze in the pump,
reservoir and hoses.
For capacities, see page 283.
Battery
06
``
241
Warning symbols on the battery
Use protective goggles.
Further information in the
owner's manual.
Store the battery out of
the reach of children.
The battery contains cor-
rosive acid.
Avoid sparks and naked
flames.
Risk of explosion.
NOTE
An expended battery must be recycled in an
environmentally responsible manner - it
contains lead.
Operation
Check that the cables to the battery are
correctly connected and properly tight-
ened.
Never disconnect the battery when the
engine is running.
The service life and function of the battery is
influenced by factors such as the number of
starts, discharging, driving style, driving con-
ditions, climatic conditions etc.
IMPORTANT
Never use a quick charger to charge the
battery.
WARNING
Batteries can generate oxyhydrogen gas,
which is highly explosive. One spark, which
can be generated if you connect jump leads
incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery
explode. The battery contains sulphuric
acid, which can cause serious burns. If sul-
phuric acid comes into contact with eyes,
skin or clothing, flush with large quantities
of water. If acid splashes into the eyes, seek
medical attention immediately.
Battery
06
242
NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it
becomes discharged repeatedly.
The life of the battery is affected by several
factors, including driving conditions and cli-
mate. Battery starting capacity decreases
gradually with time and therefore needs to
be recharged if the car is not used for a
longer time or when it is only driven short
distances. Extreme cold further limits star-
ting capacity.
To maintain the battery in good condition, at
least 15 minutes of driving/week is recom-
mended or that the battery is connected to
a battery charger with automatic trickle
charging.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a
maximum service life.
Changing
Removal
Switch off the ignition and wait for 5 minutes.
Open the clips on the front cover and
remove the cover.
Release the rubber moulding so that the
rear cover is free.
Remove the rear cover by screwing one
quarter turn and lifting it away.
Battery
06
243
WARNING
Connect and disconnect the positive and
negative cables in the correct sequence.
Detach the black negative cable
Detach the red positive cable
Detach the ventilation hose from the bat-
tery
Loosen the screw holding the battery
clamp.
Move the battery to the side and lift it up.
Installation
1. Lower the battery into the battery box.
2. Move the battery inward and to the side
until it reaches the rear edge of the box.
3. Screw in the battery with the screw in the
clamp.
4. Connect the ventilation hose.
5. Connect the red positive cable.
6. Connect the black negative cable.
7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal).
8. Reinstall the rubber moulding. (See
Removal).
9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it with
the clips. (See Removal).
Fuses
06
244
General
All electrical functions and components are
protected by a number of fuses in order to pro-
tect the car's electrical system from damage by
short circuiting or overloading.
If an electrical component or function does not
work, it may be because the component's fuse
was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the
same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault
in the circuit. Volvo recommends that you visit
an authorised Volvo workshop for checking.
Changing
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side
to see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse
of the same colour and amperage.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause signifi-
cant damage to the electrical system and
possibly lead to fire.
Location, fuse boxes
G
0
1
7
4
6
1
Location of fuse boxes, left-hand drive
If the car is right-hand drive, the fuse box
changes to under the side of the glovebox.
Under the glovebox
Engine compartment
Cargo area
Fuses
06
``
245
Engine compartment
Fuses
06
General fuses, engine compartment
On the inside of the cover are tweezers that
facilitate the removal and fitting of fuses.
Positions (see preceding illustration)
Engine compartment, upper
Engine compartment, front
Engine compartment, lower
These fuses are all located in the engine com-
partment box. Fuses in are located under
.
Fuses 1-7 and 42-44 are of the "Midi Fuse"
type and must only be replaced by a work-
shop. Volvo recommends an authorised
Volvo workshop.
8-15 and 34 are of the "JCASE" type and
the recommendation for changing is that
you visit an authorised Volvo workshop.
16 33 and 35 41 are of the "MiniFuse"
type.
Function A
Primary fuse CEM KL30A 50
Primary fuse CEM KL30B 50
Primary fuse RJBA KL30 60
Primary fuse RJBB KL30 60
Function A
Primary fuse RJBD KL30 50
- -
PTC Air preheater* 100
- -
Windscreen wipers 30
Parking heater* 25
Ventilation fan 40
- -
ABS pump 40
ABS valves 20
- -
Headlamp levelling*
(Xenon, Dual Xenon)
10
Primary fuse CEM 20
Radar, ACC control mod-
ule*
5
Function A
Speed related power
steering*
5
Engine Control Module
(ECM), transm. SRS
10
Heated washer nozzles* 10
Vacuum pump I5T 20
Lighting panel 5
Headlamp washers* 15
12 V socket, front and rear
seat
Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE)*
15
Sunroof*, Roof console/
ECC*
5
Relay, engine compart-
ment box
5
Auxiliary lamps* 20
Horn 15
Engine Control Module
(ECM)
10
Fuses
06
``
Function A
Control module, auto-
matic gearbox*
15
Compressor A/C 15
Relay coils 5
Starter motor relay 30
Ignition coils 20
EGR, VTC, Glow system
(5-cyl. diesel), Bypass
engine cooling system (4-
cyl. diesel)
10
Engine control module,
Throttle petrol
Engine control module,
Throttle diesel
10
15
Injection system, Mass air
flow sensor
15
Mass air flow sensor (4-
cyl. diesel)
10
Engine valves 10
Function A
EVAP, Lambda-sond,
Injection (petrol)
Lambda-sond (4-cyl. pet-
rol, 5-cyl. diesel)
15
10
Crankcase ventilation
heater (5-cyl. petrol)
10
Diesel filter heater, crank-
case ventilation heater (4-
cyl. diesel)
15
Diesel filter heater, crank-
case ventilation heater (5-
cyl. diesel)
20
- -
Glow plugs (4-cyl. diesel) 60
Glow plugs (5-cyl. diesel) 70
- -
Cooling fan (4 - 5-cyl. pet-
rol), (4-cyl. diesel)
60
Cooling fan (6-cyl. petrol,
5-cyl. diesel)
80
Fuses
06
Under the glovebox
1. Fold aside the interior trim covering the
fuse box.
2. Press the cover's lock and fold it up.
3. The fuses are accessible.
Positions
Function A
Rain sensor* 5
SRS system 10
ABS brakes, electric park-
ing brake
5
Function A
Accelerator pedal, air
heater (PTC)*, heated
seats*
7,5
- -
ICM display, CD & Radio
A
,
RSE system*
15
Steering wheel module 7,5
- -
Function A
Main beam 15
Sunroof* 20
Reversing lamps 7,5
- -
Fog lamp, front* 15
Windscreen washers 15
Fuses
06
``
Function A
Adaptive cruise control,
ACC*
10
- -
Roof lighting, control panel
driver's door/Power pas-
senger seat*
7,5
Information display 5
Power driver's seat* 5
Windscreen wiper, rear 15
Remote control key
receiver, alarm sensors*
5
Fuel pump 20
Electric steering lock 20
- -
Lock, tank/tailgate 10
Alarm siren*, ECC 5
Function A
Start/stop button 5
Brake light switch 5
A
Not Premium or High Performance.
Fuses
06
Cargo area
G
0
3
2
9
1
9
The fuse box is located behind the upholstery
on the left-hand side.
Positions
(black) A
Control panel, driver's door 25
Control panel, passenger
door
25
Control panel, rear door, left 25
(black) A
Control panel, rear door,
right
25
- -
12 V socket, cargo area,
refrigerator*
15
Rear window defroster 30
- -
(black) A
Trailer socket 2* 15
Power seat driver's side* 25
Trailer socket 1* 40
POT (automatic tailgate
opening)*
30
Fuses
06
(white) A
- -
Control module Four C* 15
Seat heating, driver's side
front*
15
Seat heating, passenger side
front*
15
Seat heating right rear* 15
AWD control module 10
Seat heating left rear* 15
- -
Power seat passenger side* 25
Keyless drive* 20
Electric parking brake, left 30
Electric parking brake, right 30
(blue) A
Display RTI*
Parking camera*
10
- -
Bass speaker* 25
- -
Audio amplifier* 25
Audio system
A
15
Phone, Bluetooth* 5
-
-
A
High Performance and Premium.
Wheels and tyres
06
252
General
Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characte-
ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pres-
sure and speed rating are important for how the
car performs.
Direction of rotation
G
0
2
1
7
7
8
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed
to only turn in one direction have the direction
of rotation marked with an arrow. The tyre must
always rotate in the same direction throughout
its lifespan. Tyres should only be switched
between front and rear positions, never
between left and right-hand sides, or vice
versa. If the tyre is mounted incorrectly, the
car's braking characteristics and capacity to
force rain and slush out of the way are
adversely affected.
NOTE
Ensure that tyres of the same type and
dimensions, and also the same make, are
fitted to all four wheels.
Follow the recommended tyre pressures
specified in the tyre pressure table, see
page 262.
Tyre care
Tyre age
All tyres older than 6 years old should be
checked by an expert even if they seem
undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even
if they are hardly ever or never used. The func-
tion can therefore be affected. This also applies
to spare tyres, winter tyres and tyres saved for
future use. Examples of external signs which
indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are
cracks or discoloration.
New tyres
G
0
2
1
8
2
3
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they
begin to harden at the same time as the friction
capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate.
For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as
possible when you replace them. This is espe-
cially important with regard to winter tyres. The
last four digits in the sequence mean the week
and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's
DOT marking (Department of Transportation),
and this is stated with four digits, for example
1502. The tyre in the illustration was manufac-
tured in week 15 of 2002.
Summer and winter tyres
When summer and winter wheels are changed,
see page 255, the wheels should be marked
with which side of the car they were mounted
on, for example L for left and R for right.
Wheels and tyres
06
``
253
Wear and maintenance
The correct tyre pressure results in more even
wear, see page 261. Driving style, tyre pres-
sure, climate and road condition affect how
quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid dif-
ferences in tread depth and to prevent wear
patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can
be switched with each other. A suitable dis-
tance for the first change is approx. 5000 km
and then at 10 000 km intervals. Volvo recom-
workshop for checking if you are uncertain
about tread depth.
Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging
up - and not standing up.
WARNING
A damaged tyre can lead to loss of control
of the car.
Tyres with tread wear indicators
G
0
2
1
8
2
9
Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless
bands across the width of the tread. On the
side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear
Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down
to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height
with the tread wear indicators. Change to new
tyres as soon as possible. Remember that
tyres with little tread depth provide very poor
grip in rain and snow.
Rims and wheel bolts
IMPORTANT
The wheel bolts must be tightened to
140 Nm. Overtightening can damage the
nuts and the bolts.
Only use rims that are tested and approved by
Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accesso-
ries. Check the torque with a torque wrench.
Locking wheel bolts
Locking wheel bolts can be used on both alu-
minium and steel rims.
Winter tyres
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular
dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent
on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres,
the correct tyres must be fitted to all four
wheels.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo
dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types
are most suitable.
Studded tyres
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for
500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into
the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the
studs, a longer service life.
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded
tyres vary from country to country.
Wheels and tyres
06
Tread depth
Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem-
peratures place considerably higher demands
on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo there-
fore recommends not to drive on winter tyres
that have a tread depth of less than 4 millime-
tres.
Using snow chains
Snow chains may only be used on the front
wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).
Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow
chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
Never use quick-fit snow chains as the space
between the brake discs and the wheels is too
small.
IMPORTANT
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva-
lent chains designed specifically for the car
model, and tyre and wheel rim dimensions.
In the event of uncertainty Volvo recom-
mends that you consult an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Tools
A foam block contains all the tools. The tools
consist of a towing eye, jack* and wheel
wrench*. The foam block is screwed into a
bracket in the bottom of the spare wheel well.
Jack*
The original jack should only be used for
changing wheels. The jack's thread must
always be well greased.
Spare wheel*
The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only
intended for temporary use. Replace the spare
wheel with a normal wheel as soon as possible.
The car's handling may be altered by the use
of the spare wheel. The correct tyre pressure
for the spare wheel is stated in the tyre pres-
sure table, see page 262.
IMPORTANT
Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a spare
wheel on the car.
IMPORTANT
The car must never be driven fitted with
more than one temporary spare wheel.
The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel
well with the outside down. Two foam blocks,
one under the spare wheel and one over/inside
affix the spare wheel in position. The upper one
contains all tools.
The same bolt runs through to secure the spare
wheel and the foam blocks.
Taking out the spare wheel
1. Fold up the cargo area floor, from the rear
and forwards.
Wheels and tyres
06
``
2. Undo the retaining screw.
3. Lift out the foam block with its tools.
4. Lift out the spare wheel.
The lower foam block does not need to be lifted
out.
Tools - returning into place
G
0
2
9
3
3
6
The tools and jack* must be returned to their
correct places after use. The jack must be
cranked together to the correct position in
order to have space.
The foam block and spare wheel must be
replaced in the reverse order to taking out.
Note that there is an arrow on the upper foam
block. It must point forwards in the car.
IMPORTANT
The tools and jack* must be stored in the
intended location in the car's cargo area
when not in use.
NOTE
If the floor hatch in the cargo area floor is not
closed then privacy locking does not work,
see page 45.
Changing wheels
Removing
Set up the warning triangle, see page 215 if a
wheel must be replaced at a busy location. The
car and jack* must be on a firm horizontal sur-
face.
1. Apply the parking brake and engage first
gear, or position P if the car has an auto-
matic gearbox.
WARNING
Check that the jack is not damaged, that the
threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it
is free from dirt.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack* that
belongs to the car model in question.
2. Take out the spare wheel*, jack* and wheel
wrench* that are located under the cargo
area floor in the cargo area. If another jack
is selected, see page 226.
3. Place chocks in front of and behind the
wheels which will remain on the ground.
Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones.
Wheels and tyres
06
4. (For cars with steel rims.) Prize off the
wheel cover with the end of the wheel
wrench, or pull it off by hand.
5. Loosen the wheel nuts 1 turn anticlock-
wise with the wheel wrench.
WARNING
Never position anything between the
ground and the jack, nor between the jack-
ing point and the jack.
6. There are two jacking points on each side
of the car. There is a recess in the plastic
cover at each point. Crank the foot of the
jack down so it is pressed squarely on the
ground.
7. Lift the car so that the wheel is free.
Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the
wheel.
Installation
1. Clean the contact surfaces on wheels,
hubs and brake discs.
2. Put on the wheel. Screw in the wheel bolts.
3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot
rotate.
G
0
2
2
9
1
6
4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is
important that the wheel bolts are tight-
ened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check
the torque with a torque wrench.
5. Fit on the wheel cover (for cars with steel
rims).
NOTE
The hubcap outlet for the valve must be
located over the valve on the rim when fit-
ted.
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised
on the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack.
Park the car so that passengers have the car
- or preferably a crash barrier - between
them and the road.
Emergency puncture repair*
G
0
2
3
3
0
9
Wheels and tyres
06
``
General
The emergency puncture repair kit is used to
seal a puncture as well as to check and adjust
the tyre pressure. It consists of a compressor
and a bottle with sealing fluid. The kit works as
a temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottle
must be replaced before its expiration date and
after use.
The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc-
tured in the tread.
NOTE
The emergency puncture repair kit is only
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in
the tread.
The emergency puncture repair kit has limited
capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in
the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency
puncture repair kit if they have larger slits,
cracks or similar damage.
12 V sockets for the compressor are located by
the centre console in the front, by the rear seat
and in the cargo area. Choose the electrical
socket that is nearest the punctured tyre.
Taking out the emergency puncture
repair kit
Set up the warning triangle adjacent to a traf-
ficked location. The emergency puncture
repair kit is located under the floor in the cargo
area.
1. Raise the floor hatch in the cargo area floor.
2. Unscrew the retaining screw.
3. Lift away the foam block holding the jack*
and wheel wrench*.
4. Lift up the emergency puncture repair kit.
Replace the parts after use.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has been
used. Volvo recommends that you visit an
authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of
the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance
is 200 km). The staff there can determine
whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if
it needs to be replaced.
Overview
Label, maximum permitted speed
Switch
Cable
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Protective cap
Pressure reducing valve
Air hose
Sealing fluid bottle
Pressure gauge
Wheels and tyres
06
258
Sealing punctured tyres
G
0
1
4
3
3
8
For information on the function of the parts, see
preceding illustration.
1. Open the lid of the emergency puncture
repair kit.
2. Detach the label for maximum permitted
speed and affix it to the steering wheel.
WARNING
The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the
case of contact with skin, wash away the
fluid with soap and water.
3. Check that the switch is in position 0 and
locate the cable and the air hose.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle seal. The seal is bro-
ken when the bottle is screwed in.
4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the
bottle's stopper.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
5. Screw the bottle into its holder.
6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the bot-
tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and
start the car.
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the com-
pressor is operating. If cracks or uneven-
ness arise then the compressor must be
switched off immediately. The journey
should not continue. Contacting an author-
ised tyre centre is recommended.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure
can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure
drops after approximately 30seconds.
8. Flick the switch to position I.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
Wheels and tyres
06
``
259
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole
in the tyre is too big. The journey should not
continue. Contacting an authorised tyre
centre is recommended.
10. Switch off the compressor to check the
pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum
pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum is
3.5 bar.
11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the
cable from the 12 V socket.
12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit
the valve cap.
13. As soon as possible, drive approximately
3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so
that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.
Inflating the tyres
The car's original tyres can be inflated by the
compressor.
1. The compressor must be switched off.
Make sure that the switch is in position 0
and locate the cable and air hose.
2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the bot-
tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes can result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine run-
ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf-
ficient ventilation.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
3. Connect the cable to one of the car's 12 V
sockets and start the car.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch
to position I.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on
the tyre pressure label/table, see
page 262. (Release air using the pressure
reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too
high.)
6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and cable.
7. Refit the dust cap.
Rechecking the repair and pressure
1. Reconnect the equipment.
2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge.
If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is
insufficiently sealed. The journey should
not be continued. Contact a tyre centre.
If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3
bar, the tyre must be inflated to the pres-
sure specified on the tyre pressure
label/table, see page 262. Release air
using the pressure reducing valve if the
tyre pressure is too high.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
3. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and cable. Refit the dust cap.
4. Return the emergency puncture repair kit
to the cargo area.
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and hose must be
replaced after use. Volvo recommends that
this replacement is performed by an author-
Wheels and tyres
06
260
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends that you drive to the near-
est authorised Volvo workshop for the replace-
ment/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise the
workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has been
used. Volvo recommends that you visit an
authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of
the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance
is 200 km). The staff there can determine
whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if
it needs to be replaced.
Replacing the sealing fluid canister
Replace the bottle when the expiration date
has passed. Treat the old bottle as environ-
mentally hazardous waste.
WARNING
The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural
rubber-latex.
Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic
reaction in the event of skin contact.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
Store out of the reach of children.
NOTE
Leave the container at a collection point for
storing dangerous waste.
Specifications
Designation of dimensions
225/50R17 98W.
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres.
Example of designation:
225 Section width (mm)
50 Ratio between section height and
width (%)
R Radial ply
17 Rim diameter in inches (")
98 Tyre load index
W Speed rating for maximum permitted
speed (in this case 270 km/h).
Speed ratings
The car is approved as a whole, which means
that tyre dimensions and speed ratings must
not differ from those specified on the car's reg-
istration document.
The only exception to these conditions is win-
ter tyres (both those with metal studs and those
without). If such a tyre is chosen, the car must
not be driven faster than the speed rating of the
tyre (for example, class Q can be driven at a
maximum of 160 km/h).
Traffic regulations determine how fast a car
can be driven, not the speed rating of the tyres.
Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)
T 190 km/h
H 210 km/h
V 240 km/h
W 270 km/h
Y 300 km/h
Wheels and tyres
06
``
261
NOTE
It is the maximum permitted speed that is
stated in the table.
Tyre pressure
G
0
2
1
8
3
0
The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door
pillar (between front and rear door) shows
which pressures the tyres should have at dif-
ferent loads and speed conditions, this is also
specified in the tyre pressure table, see below.
Tyre pressure for the car's recommended
tyre dimension
ECO pressure
Spare wheel tyre pressure (Temporary
Spare)
NOTE
Temperature differences change the
tyre pressure.
Wheels and tyres
06
262
Recommended tyre pressure
Variant
V70
Tyre size Speed
(km/h)
Load, 1 3 persons Max. load ECO pres-
sure
A
Without TPMS With
TPMS
Front (kPa)
B
Rear (kPa) Front/
rear (kPa)
Front
(kPa)
Rear (kPa) Front/rear
(kPa)
6-cyl. 225/55 R 16
225/50 R 17
245/45 R 17
0-160 230 210 230 260 260 260
160 + 280 280 280 300 300 -
245/40 R 18 0-160 230 210 230 260 260 260
160 + 270 270 270 290 290 -
5-cyl. diesel
205 hp
225/55 R 16
225/50 R 17,
245/45 R 17
0-160 220 210 220 260 260 260
160 + 260 260 260 270 270 -
245/40 R 18 0-160 230 210 230 260 260 260
160 + 260 260 260 270 270 -
Wheels and tyres
06
``
263
Variant
V70
Tyre size Speed
(km/h)
Load, 1 3 persons Max. load ECO pres-
sure
A
Without TPMS With
TPMS
Front (kPa)
B
Rear (kPa) Front/
rear (kPa)
Front
(kPa)
Rear (kPa) Front/rear
(kPa)
4-cyl. diesel
5-cyl. diesel
175/163 hp
4-cyl./5-cyl.
petrol
4-cyl./5-cyl.
Flexifuel
225/55 R 16
225/50 R 17
245/45 R 17
0-160 220 210 220 260 260 260
160 + 260 260 260 270 270 -
245/40 R 18 0-160 230 210 230 260 260 260
160 + 260 260 260 270 270 -
205/60 R 16 0-160 230 210 230 260 260 260
160 + 270 270 270 290 290 -
Spare
wheel
C
T 125/80 R 17 max. 80 420 420 - 420 420 -
A
Economical driving.
B
In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
C
Temporary spare.
Wheels and tyres
06
264
Variant
XC70
Tyre size Speed
(km/h)
Load, 1 3 persons Max. load ECO pressure
A
Front (kPa)
B
Rear (kPa) Front
(kPa)
Rear (kPa) Front/rear (kPa)
6-cyl., 5-cyl. 215/65 R 16
235/55 R 17
235/50 R 18
235/45 R 19
0 160 230 230 260 260 260
160 + 240 240 280 280 -
Spare
wheel
C
T 125/80 R 17 max. 80 420 420 420 420 -
A
Economical driving.
B
In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
C
Temporary spare.
Fuel economy, ECO pressure
At speeds under 160 km/h, the general tyre
pressure is recommended (applies for full load
and light load) in order to obtain optimum fuel
economy.
Checking the tyre pressure
The tyre pressures must be checked every
month. This also applies to the car's spare
wheel. After several few kilometres of driving,
the tyres warm up and the pressure increases.
Check tyre pressures on cold tyres. "Cold
tyres" means the tyres are the same tempera-
ture as the ambient temperature.
Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel con-
sumption, shortens tyre lifespan and impairs
the car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre
pressure that is too low could result in the tyres
overheating and being damaged. Tyre pres-
sure affects travelling comfort, road noise and
steering characteristics.
NOTE
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a
natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also
varies depending on ambient temperature.
Car care
06
``
265
Washing the car
Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty.
Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator.
Use car shampoo.
Remove bird droppings from the paintwork
as soon as possible. Bird droppings con-
tain chemicals that affect and discolour
paintwork very quickly. An authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended for the
removal of any discoloration.
Hose down the underbody.
Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt.
Do not spray directly onto the locks.
Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and
plenty of lukewarm water.
Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm
soap solution or car shampoo.
Use cold degreasing agent on very dirty
surfaces.
Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or
a water scraper.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-
shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is
hot.
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functional-
ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for
example.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog
lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have
condensation on the inside of the lens. This
is a natural phenomenon, all outside lighting
is designed to withstand this. Condensation
is normally vented out of the lamp housing
when it has been switched on for a time.
Cleaning the wiper blades
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades,
as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen,
impair the service life of wiper blades.
For cleaning:
Set the wiper blades in service position,
see page 239.
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg-
ularly with lukewarm soap solution or car
shampoo.
Do not use any strong solvents.
Automatic car washes
An automatic car wash is a simple and quick
way of washing the car, but it cannot reach
everywhere. Handwashing the car is recom-
mended for achieving optimum results.
NOTE
During the first few months a new car must
only be handwashed. This is because the
paintwork is more sensitive when it is new.
High-pressure washing
When using high-pressure washing, use
sweeping movements and make sure that the
nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the
surface of the car (the distance applies to all
exterior parts). Do not spray directly onto the
locks.
Testing the brakes
WARNING
Always test the brakes after washing the
car, including the parking brake, to ensure
that moisture and corrosion do not attack
the brake linings and reduce braking per-
formance.
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then
when driving long distances in rain or slush.
The heat from the friction causes the brake lin-
Car care
06
ings to warm up and dry. Do the same thing
after starting in very damp or cold weather.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
dealers is recommended for cleaning coloured
plastic parts, rubber and trim components,
such as glossy trim mouldings. When using
such a cleaning agent the instructions must be
followed carefully.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rub-
ber, only rub with light pressure if it is nec-
essary. Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear
away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must
not be used.
Rims
Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by
Volvo.
Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the
surface and cause stains on chrome-plated
aluminium rims.
Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull
or to give the paintwork extra protection.
The car does not need to be polished until it is
at least one year old. However, the car can be
waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax
the car in direct sunlight.
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt
and tar stains using Volvo tar remover or white
spirit. More stubborn stains can be removed
using fine rubbing paste designed for car paint-
work.
Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq-
uid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the
packaging carefully. Many preparations con-
tain both polish and wax.
IMPORTANT
Paint treatment such as preserving, sealing,
protection, lustre sealing or similar could
damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage
caused by such treatments is not covered
by Volvo warranty.
Water-repellent coating*
Never use products such as car wax,
degreaser or similar on glass surfa-
ces as this could ruin their water-repellent
properties.
Take care when cleaning so as not to damage
the glass surface.
To avoid damaging glass surfaces when
removing ice only use plastic ice scrapers.
There is natural wear of the water-repellent
coating.
Treatment with a special finishing agent avail-
able from Volvo dealers is recommended in
order to maintain the water-repellent proper-
ties. This should be used first after three years
and then each year.
Rustproofing inspection and
maintenance
The car received a thorough and complete
rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body
are made of galvanised sheet metal. The
underbody is protected by a wear-resistant
anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating
rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the
exposed members, cavities, closed sections
and side doors.
Car care
06
``
267
Under normal conditions the rustproofing does
not require treatment for approximately 12
years. After this period, it should be treated at
three-year intervals. Volvo recommends that
you engage an authorised Volvo workshop for
assistance if the car needs further treatment.
Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it is
important to keep the car clean. The car's rust-
proofing needs to be checked regularly and
touched-up if necessary in order for it to be
maintained.
Cleaning the interior
Only use cleaning agents and car care prod-
ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly
and follow the instructions included with the
car care product.
Stains on fabric upholstery and roof
upholstery
A special fabric cleaning agent, available from
authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to
avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of
the upholstery. Use water and a synthetic
detergent to clean the seatbelts. Make sure the
seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the
fabric upholstery.
Treating stains on leather upholstery
Volvo leather upholstery is chromium-free and
approved in accordance with the Oeko-Tex
100 standard.
The leather is refined and processed so that it
retains its natural characteristics. It is given a
protective coating, but regular cleaning is
required in order to maintain both characteris-
tics and appearance. Volvo offers a compre-
hensive product for the cleaning and treatment
of leather upholstery which, when used in
accordance with the instructions, preserves
the leather's protective coating.After a period
of use the natural appearance of the leather will
nevertheless emerge, depending more or less
on the surface texture of the leather. This is a
natural maturing of the leather and shows that
it is a natural product.
To achieve best results Volvo recommends
cleaning and application of the protective
cream once to four times per year (or more if
required). Ask a Volvo dealer about Volvo's
Leather care product.
IMPORTANT
Never use strong solvents. Such products
may damage fabric, vinyl and leather
upholstery.
IMPORTANT
Note that materials with colour that runs
when dry (new jeans, suede garments etc.)
may discolour the upholstery material.
Washing instructions for leather
upholstery
1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened
sponge and squeeze out a strong foam.
2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular
movements.
3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the
stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the
stain. Do not rub.
4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and
allow the leather to dry completely.
Protective treatment of leather
upholstery
1. Pour a small amount of the protective
cream on the felted cloth and massage in
a thin layer of cream with gentle circular
movements on the leather.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes
before use.
The leather has now been given improved pro-
tection against stains and improved UV pro-
tection.
Car care
06
268
Treating stains on interior plastic, metal
and wood parts
A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly
moistened with water, available from Volvo
dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior
parts and surfaces.
Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong
stain removers. A special cleaning agent avail-
able from Volvo dealers can be used for more
difficult cleaning.
Carpets and cargo area
Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of
the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a
vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.
Touching up paintwork
Paint is an important part of the car's rust-
proofing and should therefore be checked reg-
ularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged
paintwork should be rectified immediately. The
most common types of paintwork damage are
stone chips, scratches, and marks on the
edges of wings and doors.
Materials
primer in a can
paint in a can or touch-up pen
brush
masking tape
Colour code
Car colour code
It is important that the correct colour is used.
For product decal location, see page 272.
Repairing stone chips
G
0
2
1
8
3
2
Before work is begun, the car must be clean
and dry and at a temperature above 15 C.
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the
damaged surface. Then remove the tape to
remove any loose paint.
2. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
brush or a matchstick. Apply paint using a
brush once the primer is dry.
3. For scratches, proceed as above, but
mask around the damaged area to protect
the undamaged paintwork.
4. After a few days, polish the touched-up
areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount
of lapping paste.
NOTE
If the stone chip has not penetrated to the
bare metal and there is an undamaged col-
our coat, you can paint straight after clean-
ing the damaged surface.
06
269
G
0
0
0
0
0
0
270
Type designations................................................................................. 272
Dimensions and weights....................................................................... 274
Engine specifications............................................................................ 279
Engine oil............................................................................................... 280
Fluids and lubricants............................................................................. 283
Fuel....................................................................................................... 286
Electrical system................................................................................... 288
Type approval....................................................................................... 289
07
SPECI FI CATI ONS
07 Specifications
Type designations
07
272
Label location
07 Specifications
Type designations
07
273
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle
identification and engine numbers can facili-
tate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealer
regarding the car and when ordering spare
parts and accessories.
Type designation, vehicle identification
number, maximum permissible weights,
codes for colour and upholstery and type
approval number.
Label for parking heater.
The engine oil label specifies oil grade and
viscosity.
Engine type designation, component and
serial number.
Gearbox type designation and serial num-
ber.
Manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
Car's identification number. (VIN Vehicle
Identification Number)
Further information on the car is presented in
the registration document.
NOTE
The labels shown in the owner's manual are
not provided as exact reproductions of
those in the car. The purpose is to show
their approximate appearance and location
in the car. The information that applies to
your car in particular is available on the label
in question in your car.
07 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
07
274
Dimensions
V70.
Dimensions mm
A Wheelbase 2816
B Length 4823
C Load length, floor,
folded seat
1878
D Load length, floor 1089
E Height 1547
F Load height 724
Dimensions mm
G Front track 1578
H Rear track 1586
I Load width, floor 1153
J Width 1861
K Width including door
mirrors
2106
07 Specifications
07
``
275
XC70.
Dimensions mm
A Wheelbase 2815
B Length 4838
C Load length, floor,
folded seat
1878
D Load length, floor 1089
E Height 1604
F Load height 724
G Front track 1604
Dimensions mm
H Rear track 1570
I Load width, floor 1153
J Width 1861
K Width including door
mirrors
2119
Weights
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
90% full and all fluids.
The weight of passengers and accessories,
and towball load (when a trailer is hitched, see
table) influences the payload and is not
included in the kerb weight.
Permitted maximum load = Gross vehicle
weight - Kerb weight.
07 Specifications
07
276
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to
cars in the standard version - i.e. a car with-
out extra equipment or accessories. This
means that for every accessory added the
loading capacity of the car is reduced cor-
respondingly by the weight of the acces-
sory.
Examples of accessories that reduce load-
ing capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/
Summum equipment levels, as well as other
accessories such as Towbar, Load carriers,
Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary lamps,
GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Safety grille, Car-
pets, Cargo cover, Power seats, etc.
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer-
taining the kerb weight of your own partic-
ular car.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
For information on decal location, see page 272.
Gross vehicle weight
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
Equipment level
Max. load: See registration document.
Max. roof load: 100 kg.
07 Specifications
07
``
277
Towing capacity and towball load
Engine Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
2.0F AWD Automatic, MPS6 1000 50
All All (except 2.0F with Automatic, MPS6) 1200 50
2.0 Manual, MTX75 1320 75
2.0F Manual, MTX75 1320 75
2.5T Manual, M66 1600 75
2.5T Automatic, TF-80SC 1800 90
2.5FT Manual, M66 1600 75
2.5FT Automatic, TF-80SC 1800 90
3.2 Automatic, TF-80SC 1800 90
T6 AWD Automatic, TF-80SC 2000 90
2.0D Manual, MMT6 1600 75
2.4D Manual, M66 (V70) 1800
(XC70) 1500
90
75
2.4D Automatic, TF-80SC (V70) 1800
(XC70) 1500
90
75
2.4D AWD Manual, M66 (XC70) 2100 90
2.4D AWD Automatic, TF-80SC (XC70) 2100 90
07 Specifications
07
278
Engine Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
D5 Manual, M66 (V70) 1800 90
D5 Automatic, TF-80SC (V70) 2000 90
D5 AWD Manual, M66 (V70) 1800
(XC70) 2100
(V70) 90
(XC70) 90
D5 AWD Automatic, TF-80SC (V70) 2000
(XC70) 2100
90
Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
750 50
NOTE
The use of a stabilising device is recom-
mended with a trailer heavier than 1800 kg.
07 Specifications
Engine specifications
07
279
Engine specifications
Model Engine Output
(kW/
rpm)
Output
(hp/rpm)
Torque (Nm/
rpm)
No.
of
cyl-
in-
ders
Bore
(mm)
Stroke
(mm)
Swept vol-
ume (litres)
Compres-
sion ratio
2.0 B4204S3 107/6000 145/6000 190/4500 4 87 83.0 1,999 10.8:1
2.0F B4204S4 107/6000 145/6000 190/4500 4 87 83.0 1,999 10.8:1
2.5FT
A
B5254T11 170/4800 231/4800 340/17004800 5 83 93.2 2,521 9.0:1
2.5T B5254T10 170/4800 231/4800 340/17004800 5 83 93.2 2,521 9.0:1
3.2 B6324S 168/6200 238/6200 320/3200 6 84 96,0 3,192 10.8:1
T6 B6304T2 210/5600 285/5600 400/15004800 6 82 93.2 2,953 9.3:1
2.0D D4204T 100/4000 136/4000 320/2000 4 85 88.0 1,997 18.5:1
2.4D D5244T14 129/3000
4000
175/3000
4000
420/15002750 5 81 93.2 2.400 16,5:1
2.4D D5244T16
B
120/4000 163/4000 340/17502750 5 81 93.1 2.400 17,3:1
D5 D5244T10 151/4000 205/4000 420/15003250 5 81 93.2 2.400 16,5:1
A
Only V70.
B
Only Belgium
07 Specifications
Engine oil
07
280
Engine oil
Adverse driving conditions
Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor-
mally high oil temperature or oil consumption.
Check the oil level more frequently for long
journeys:
towing a caravan or trailer
in mountainous regions
at high speeds
in temperatures colder than -30 C or hot-
ter than +40 C
shorter driving distances (shorter than
10 km) at low temperatures (under 5 C).
This can produce abnormally high oil tempera-
ture or oil consumption.
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse
driving conditions. It provides extra protection
for the engine.
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard to
service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact. An
approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals can
be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of
oil (see the engine compartment decal) for
both filling and oil change, otherwise you
will risk affecting service life, starting cha-
racteristics, fuel consumption and environ-
mental impact. Volvo Car Corporation dis-
claims all warranty liability if engine oil of the
prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.
G
0
2
1
8
3
4
Viscosity chart.
07 Specifications
Engine oil
07
``
281
Oil decal
Engine variant Volume between MIN and
MAX (litres)
Volume
(litres)
A
G
0
3
2
0
7
8
When the label shown here is fitted in the car's
engine compartment then the following applies.
For information on decal location, see
page 228.
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
Viscosity: SAE 0W30
2.0 B4204S3 0,8 4.3
2.5FT B5254T8 1.3 5.5
2.5T B5254T6 1.3 5.5
3.2 B6324S 1.2 7.4
T6 B6304T2 1.2 7.4
2.4D D5244T14 1.5 6.0
D5 D5244T10 1.5 6.0
07 Specifications
Engine oil
07
282
Engine variant Volume between MIN and
MAX (litres)
Volume
(litres)
A
G
0
3
2
0
7
9
When the oil label shown here is fitted in the
car's engine compartment then the following
applies. For location see page 228.
Oil grade: WSS-M2C913-B
Viscosity: SAE 5W30
When driving under adverse conditions, use
ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.
2.0F B4204S4 0,8 4.3
2.0D D4204T 1,8 5.0
A
Including filter change
07 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
07
``
283
Other fluids and lubricants
Engine Gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid
2.0 petrol Manual, MTX75 1.9 BOT 350M3
2.0 petrol Automatic, MPS6 5.5 BOT 341
2.0F Flexifuel Manual, MTX75 1.9 BOT 350M3
2.0F Flexifuel Automatic, MPS6 5.5 BOT 341
2.5T petrol Manual, M66 1.9 BOT 350M3
2.5T petrol Automatic, TF-80SC 5.5 BOT 341
2.5FT Flexifuel Manual, M66 1.9 BOT 350M3
2.5FT Flexifuel Automatic, TF-80SC 5.5 BOT 341
3.2 petrol Automatic, TF-80SC 5.5 BOT 341
T6 petrol Automatic, TF-80SC 5.5 BOT 341
2.0D diesel Manual, MMT6 1,7 BOT 350M3
2.4D diesel Manual, M66 1.9 BOT 350M3
2.4D diesel Automatic, TF-80SC 5.5 BOT 341
D5 diesel Manual, M66 1.9 BOT 350M3
D5 diesel Automatic, TF-80SC 5.5 BOT 341
07 Specifications
07
284
Fluid System Volume (litres) Prescribed grade
Coolant Petrol engine 2.0 7,5
Coolant with corrosion inhibitor mixed
with water
A
, see packaging.
Petrol engine 2.0F 7,5
Petrol engine 2.5FT
B
9.0
Petrol engine 2.5T 9.0
Petrol engine T6 8.9
Petrol engine 3.2 8.9
Diesel engine 2.0D 9,1
Diesel engine D5/2,4D 12,6
Refrigerant Air conditioning
C
R134a (HFC134a)
Oil: PAG
Brake fluid Brake system 0.6 DOT 4+
Power steering fluid Power steering 1.2 WSS M2C204-A2 or equivalent prod-
uct.
Washer fluid Cars with headlamp washing 6.5
Use a washer antifreeze recommended
by Volvo, mixed with water.
Cars without headlamp washing 4,5
A
Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
B
Only V70.
C
Refrigerant quantity varies depending on engine variant. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for the correct information.
07 Specifications
07
285
NOTE
Under normal driving conditions, the gear-
box oil does not need to be changed during
its service life. However, this may be nec-
essary under adverse driving conditions,
see page 283.
07 Specifications
Fuel
07
286
CO
2
emissions, fuel consumption and tank volume
Model Engine Gearbox
Emissions of car-
bon dioxide (CO
2
,
g/km)
Consumption
(litre/100 km)
Tank volume (litres)
2.0 B4204S3 Manual 5-speed (MTX75) 206 8,6 approx. 70
2.0F
A
B4204S4 Manual (MTX75) 206 8,6 approx. 70
2.0F
A
B4204S4 Automatic (MPS6) 210 8,8 approx. 70
2.5T B5254T10 Manual (M66) 209 8,8 approx. 70
2.5T B5254T10 Automatic (TF-80SC) 232 9.7 approx. 70
2.5FT
A
B5254T11 Manual (M66) 209 8,8 approx. 70
2.5FT
A
B5254T11 Automatic (TF-80SC) 232 9.7 approx. 70
3.2 B6324S Automatic (TF-80SC) 244 10.2 approx. 70
3.2 B6324S Automatic (TF80SC) AWD (V70) 275
(XC70) 267
(V70) 11,7
(XC70) 11,2
approx. 70
T6 B6304T2 Automatic (TF80SC) AWD (V70) 270
(XC70) 269
(V70) 11,5
(XC70) 11,5
approx. 70
2.0D D4204T Manual (MMT6) 157 5.9 approx. 70
D5 D5244T10 Manual (M66) 169 6,4 approx. 70
D5 D5244T10 Automatic (TF-80SC) 183 6.9 approx. 70
07 Specifications
Fuel
07
287
Model Engine Gearbox
Emissions of car-
bon dioxide (CO
2
,
g/km)
Consumption
(litre/100 km)
Tank volume (litres)
D5 D5244T10 Manual (M66) AWD (XC70) 186 (XC70) 7,0 approx. 70
D5 D5244T10 Automatic (TF80SC) AWD (V70) 198
(XC70) 199
(V70) 7,5
(XC70) 7,5
approx. 70
2.4D D5244T14 Manual (M66) (V70) 159
(XC70) 159
(V70) 6,0
(XC70) 6,0
approx. 70
2.4D D5244T14 Automatic (TF-80SC) (V70) 179
(XC70) 188
(V70) 6,8
(XC70) 7,1
approx. 70
2.4D
B
D5244T14 Automatic (TF-80SC) (XC70) 199 (XC70) 7,5 approx. 70
A
A Flexifuel vehicle can be driven on any 95 octane unleaded petrol, or bioethanol E85, as well as all possible mixtures of these two fuels. The car consumes 30-40% more E85 which has a lower
energy content. The precise difference depends on driving style, ambient temperature and variations in fuel specification amongst other things.
B
Only Belgium
Fuel consumption and emissions of
carbon dioxide
Official fuel consumption figures are based on
a standard driving cycle in accordance with EU
Directive 80/1268/ EEC comb. and 92/21/EEC.
The manner in which the car is driven, and
other non-technical factors affect fuel con-
sumption. For more information, see page 9.
See page 205 for more information on fuel.
07 Specifications
Electrical system
07
288
Electrical system
12 V system with a voltage-regulated alterna-
tor. Single pole system in which the chassis
and engine block are used as conductors. The
negative terminal is connected to the chassis.
IMPORTANT
If the battery is replaced, replace it with a
battery of the same cold start capacity and
reserve capacity as the original (see the
decal on the battery).
Battery
Engine Voltage (V) Cold start capacity,
CCA - Cold Cranking Amperes (A)
Reserve capacity
(minutes)
2.5T, 2.5FT 12 520800 100160
2.0, 2.0F, T6, 3.2 12 520-700 100-135
2.0D 12 700 135
D5, 2.4D 12 700-800 135-160
07 Specifications
Type approval
07
289
Remote control system
Country
A, B, CY, CZ, D, DK,
E, EST, F, FIN, GB,
GR, H, I, IRL, L, LT,
LV, M, NL, P, PL, S,
SK, SLO
Delphi hereby
certifies that this
remote control key
system conforms to
the essential char-
acteristic require-
ments and other rel-
evant regulations of
directive 1999/5/EC.
IS, LI, N, CH
HR
ROK Delphi 2003-07-15,
Germany R-
LPD1-03-0151
BR
RC
CCAB06LP1940T4
08
290
A
ACC Adaptive cruise control................. 161
Active Bending Lights (ABL)...................... 79
Active chassis FOUR-C........................ 159
Active Dual Xenon lights............................ 79
Adaptation............................................... 100
Adapting driving characteristics.............. 159
Adaptive cruise control............................ 161
fault tracing......................................... 165
radar sensor........................................ 164
Adaptive cruise control fault tracing........ 165
Additional heater (Diesel)......................... 136
Adjusting headlamp pattern...................... 83
Active Dual Xenon headlamps.............. 84
Dual Xenon headlamps......................... 84
halogen headlamp................................ 84
Adjusting the steering wheel...................... 77
Airbag
activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 20
driver's and front passenger side......... 18
Air conditioning........................................ 130
general................................................ 126
Air conditioning, AC................................. 130
Air distribution.................................. 127, 132
Air vents................................................... 128
Alarm.......................................................... 56
alarm indicator...................................... 56
alarm signals......................................... 57
arming................................................... 56
checking the alarm............................... 42
deactivating.......................................... 56
deactivating a triggered alarm.............. 57
reduced alarm level.............................. 57
temporary disarming of the alarm........ 57
testing the alarm system...................... 58
Allergy and asthma inducing sub-
stances.................................................... 127
All-wheel drive, AWD............................... 107
All Wheel Drive (AWD).............................. 107
Approach light, duration............................ 83
Audio
headphones socket............................ 138
rear control panel................................ 138
settings............................................... 138
surround............................................. 137
Audio system........................................... 137
functions............................................. 138
overview.............................................. 137
Audio volume
phone.................................................. 193
phone/media player............................ 193
ring signal, phone............................... 193
Auto
climate control settings...................... 130
Automatic car washes............................. 265
Automatic gearbox.................................. 103
manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 103
towing and recovery........................... 221
Automatic locking...................................... 50
Automatic relocking................................... 50
AUX.......................................................... 137
Auxiliary heater........................................ 136
AWD, All-wheel drive............................... 107
B
Backrest..................................................... 73
front seat, lowering............................... 73
Backrest rear seat, lowering...................... 75
Battery............................................. 241, 288
maintenance....................................... 241
remote control key/PCC....................... 46
start assistance................................... 101
08
291
symbols on the battery....................... 241
warning symbols................................. 241
Bioethanol E85........................................ 206
Blind spot (BLIS)...................................... 184
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS...... 184
Bluetooth
handsfree............................................ 191
mute microphone............................... 193
transfer call to mobile......................... 193
Bonnet, opening...................................... 226
Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 230
Brake light.................................................. 80
Brakes...................................................... 108
anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 108
brake light............................................. 80
brake system...................................... 108
electric parking brake......................... 112
emergency brake assistance, EBA..... 108
emergency brake lights........................ 80
filling brake fluid.................................. 230
symbols in the combined instrument
panel................................................... 108
Built-in phone.......................................... 196
Bulbs, see Lighting.................................. 232
C
Calls
functions during a call................ 196, 197
incoming..................................... 192, 196
operation..................................... 192, 196
volume in phone................................. 197
waiting................................................ 197
Call waiting.............................................. 197
Camera sensor........................................ 172
Car care................................................... 265
Car care, leather upholstery.................... 267
Cargo area
cargo cover......................................... 213
lighting.................................................. 82
mounting points.................................. 208
safety grille.......................................... 212
safety net............................................ 211
Cargo cover............................................. 213
Car upholstery......................................... 267
Car wash.................................................. 265
Catalytic converter................................... 205
recovery.............................................. 221
Centre console........................................ 120
Chassis settings...................................... 159
Checking and topping up the coolant..... 229
Children..................................................... 29
child safety locks.................................. 34
child seats and side airbags................. 22
location in the car................................. 29
safety.................................................... 29
Child safety locks...................................... 55
Child seat................................................... 29
Child seats................................................. 29
integrated two-stage booster cushion. 32
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats. . . 34
recommended...................................... 30
size classes for child seats with the ISO-
FIX fixture system................................. 35
upper mounting points for child seats.. 37
Cigarette lighter socket............................ 189
Cleaning
automatic car washes......................... 265
car wash............................................. 265
rims..................................................... 266
seatbelts............................................. 267
upholstery........................................... 267
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)........ 127
Climate control........................................ 126
general................................................ 126
sensors............................................... 126
08
292
Clock, setting............................................. 70
Collision..................................................... 28
Collision warning..................................... 170
Collision warning system
radar sensor................................ 164, 170
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*......... 170
Colour code, paint................................... 268
Combined instrument panel.................... 123
Comfort inside the passenger compart-
ment......................................................... 188
Compass................................................... 94
calibration............................................. 94
setting the zone.................................... 94
Condensation in headlamps.................... 265
Controls
centre console.................................... 120
Crash, see Collision................................... 28
Cruise control.......................................... 160
CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package)......... 127
D
DAB, menu structure............................... 148
DAB Radio............................................... 147
Deadlocks.................................................. 53
deactivation.......................................... 53
temporary deactivation......................... 53
Defroster.................................................. 130
Diesel....................................................... 206
Diesel particle filter.................................. 207
Direction indicators.................................... 81
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 105
Display lighting.......................................... 78
Distance Alert.......................................... 167
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II.................... 137
Door mirrors............................................... 92
Driver Alert Control.................................. 175
Driver Alert System.................................. 175
Driving...................................................... 202
cooling system.................................... 202
with the tailgate open......................... 202
with trailer........................................... 216
Driving in water........................................ 202
towball load........................................ 275
towing capacity.................................. 275
DSTC, see also Stability control system.. 157
E
ECC, electronic climate control............... 128
Economical driving.................................. 202
ECO pressure.......................................... 261
Electrical socket...................................... 190
cargo area........................................... 190
front seat............................................. 190
Electric parking brake.............................. 112
low battery voltage............................. 112
releasing automatically....................... 113
releasing manually.............................. 113
Emergency calls...................................... 196
Emergency equipment
warning triangle.................................. 215
Emergency puncture repair..................... 256
Emissions of carbon dioxide................... 207
Engine
overheating......................................... 216
starting.................................................. 97
Engine block heater................................... 99
fuel-driven........................................... 133
Engine braking, automatic....................... 110
08
293
Engine compartment
coolant................................................ 229
oil........................................................ 228
overview.............................................. 227
power steering fluid............................ 230
Engine oil......................................... 227, 280
adverse driving conditions.................. 280
capacities........................................... 280
filter..................................................... 228
oil grade.............................................. 280
Engine specifications............................... 279
Environmental labelling, FSC, owner's
manual....................................................... 11
Error messages
Driver Alert Control............................. 176
Lane Departure Warning..................... 179
see Messages and symbols............... 165
Error messages in BLIS........................... 186
Error messages in Distance Alert............ 168
Error messages in the Adaptive cruise con-
trol............................................................ 165
Expectant mothers, seatbelt...................... 15
External dimensions................................ 274
F
Fan........................................................... 129
Fault tracing for the camera sensor......... 173
First aid equipment.................................. 215
Flexifuel...................................................... 99
adaptation........................................... 100
Floor mats................................................ 190
Fluids, capacities..................................... 283
Fluids and oils.......................................... 283
FM, menu structure................................. 146
Fog lamp
front...................................................... 80
Fog lamps
rear........................................................ 81
Fog lamps, on/off...................................... 80
Foot brake............................................... 108
FOUR-C Active chassis........................ 159
FSC, environmental labelling..................... 11
Fuel.......................................................... 205
fuel consumption................................ 286
fuel economy.............................. 261, 264
fuel filter.............................................. 207
Fuse box.................................................. 244
glovebox............................................. 248
Fuses....................................................... 244
box in cargo area................................ 250
changing............................................. 244
general................................................ 244
relay/fuse box in engine compart-
ment.................................................... 245
Fuse table
fuses in cargo area............................. 250
fuses in engine compartment............. 246
G
Gearbox................................................... 102
automatic............................................ 103
manual................................................ 102
Gear selector inhibitor............................. 105
Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disen-
gagement................................................. 105
Geartronic................................................ 103
Glass
laminated/reinforced............................. 90
Global opening........................................ 126
08
294
Glovebox................................................. 189
locking.................................................. 51
Gross vehicle weight............................... 275
H
Hazard warning flashers............................ 81
HBS Heart Beat Sensor.......................... 43
HDC......................................................... 110
Headlamp levelling.................................... 78
Headlamp pattern, adjusting..................... 83
Headlamps............................................... 232
Headphones socket................................. 138
Head restraint
centre seat, rear.................................... 75
lowering................................................ 75
Heated washer nozzles.............................. 88
Heating.................................................... 130
rearview and door mirrors.................... 93
rear window.......................................... 93
seats................................................... 129
heat reflecting (Windscreen)...................... 90
Heat-reflecting windscreen........................ 90
High engine temperature......................... 216
High-pressure headlamp washing............. 88
Hill Descent Control................................. 110
HomeLink EU........................................ 115
Home safe lighting..................................... 83
Hoot........................................................... 77
Horn........................................................... 77
I
IAQS Interior Air Quality System........... 127
IC Inflatable Curtain................................ 24
IDIS Intelligent Driver Information Sys-
tem........................................................... 198
Ignition keys............................................... 71
IMEI number............................................ 198
Immobiliser................................................ 40
Indicator lamps, PCC................................ 42
Inflatable curtain........................................ 24
Information and warning symbols............. 66
Information button, PCC............................ 42
Information displays.................................. 65
Instrument lighting, see Lighting................ 78
Instrument overview
left-hand drive....................................... 62
right-hand drive.................................... 64
Instruments and controls........................... 62
Interior lighting, see Lighting..................... 82
Interior rearview mirror............................... 93
automatic dimming............................... 93
Intermittent wiping..................................... 87
iPod, connection................................... 140
J
Jack......................................................... 254
K
Kerb weight.............................................. 275
Key............................................................. 40
Key blade................................................... 43
Keyless drive........................................ 48, 97
Keyless start (keyless drive)................. 48, 97
Keylock.................................................... 105
08
295
Keypad in the steering
wheel................................. 77, 120, 160, 196
Key positions............................................. 71
L
Labels...................................................... 272
Laminated glass......................................... 90
Lamps, see Lighting................................ 232
Lane Departure Control........................... 178
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 267
Lighting.................................................... 232
Active Dual Xenon lights....................... 79
approach light, duration....................... 83
automatic lighting, passenger compart-
ment...................................................... 82
bulbs, specifications........................... 237
controls................................................. 82
display lighting...................................... 78
front fog lamps..................................... 80
headlamp levelling................................ 78
home safe lighting................................ 83
in passenger compartment................... 82
instrument lighting................................ 78
main/dipped beam............................... 78
position/parking lamps......................... 80
rear fog lamp........................................ 81
Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 232
cargo area........................................... 237
courtesy lighting................................. 236
dipped beam halogen......................... 233
direction indicators............................. 234
fog lamp.............................................. 235
lamp housing, rear.............................. 235
lamp housing, rear, direction indica-
tors...................................................... 235
main beam, Xenon lamp..................... 234
main beam halogen............................ 233
number plate lighting.......................... 236
parking lamps..................................... 234
side marker lamps.............................. 235
vanity mirror........................................ 237
Light switches............................................ 78
Loading
cargo area........................................... 208
general................................................ 208
mounting points.................................. 208
roof load............................................. 214
Locking/unlocking
inside.................................................... 50
tailgate............................................ 41, 51
Locks
automatic locking................................. 50
locking.................................................. 50
unlocking.............................................. 50
Lubricants................................................ 283
Lubricants, capacities.............................. 283
M
Main/dipped beam, see Lightning............. 78
Maintenance
rustproofing........................................ 266
Making calls..................................... 192, 196
Manual gearbox....................................... 102
towing and recovery........................... 221
Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 103
Memory function in seats.......................... 74
Menus and messages.............................. 120
Menu structure
DAB.................................................... 148
FM....................................................... 146
Messages and symbols
Collision Warning with Auto Brake..... 173
Distance Alert..................................... 168
08
296
Messages and symbols in the Adaptive
cruise control........................................... 165
Messages in BLIS.................................... 186
Messages in the combined instrument
panel........................................................ 123
Messages in the information display....... 157
Meters in the combined instrument panel
fuel gauge............................................. 66
speedometer......................................... 66
tachometer........................................... 66
Misting..................................................... 130
attending to the windows................... 126
condensation in headlamps............... 265
remove with the air vents................... 132
timer function...................................... 131
Mobile phone
connect............................................... 194
handsfree............................................ 191
register phone..................................... 191
O
Oil, see also Engine oil............................. 280
Oil level low.............................................. 228
Overheating............................................. 216
Owner's manual, environmental labelling. . 11
P
PACOS....................................................... 20
PACOS, switch.......................................... 20
Paintwork
colour code......................................... 268
damage and touch-up........................ 268
Panel lighting............................................. 78
Panic function............................................ 41
Parking assistance................................... 181
parking assistance sensors................ 183
Parking brake........................................... 112
Parking heater.......................................... 133
battery and fuel................................... 133
parking on a hill.................................. 133
time setting......................................... 135
Particle filter............................................. 207
Passenger compartment......................... 188
Passenger compartment filter................. 127
Passenger compartment heater
fuel-driven........................................... 133
PCC Personal Car Communicator
functions............................................... 41
range............................................... 42, 43
Petrol grade............................................. 205
Phone
built-in, overview................................ 196
connect............................................... 194
handsfree............................................ 191
incoming calls..................................... 192
making calls........................................ 192
messages........................................... 198
on/off.................................................. 196
phone book......................................... 194
phone book, shortcut......................... 194
receiving a call.................................... 193
register phone..................................... 191
ring signal........................................... 197
SIM card............................................. 199
Phone book............................................. 197
Pinch protection, sunroof.......................... 96
Polishing.................................................. 266
Position/parking lamps.............................. 80
08
297
Power seat................................................. 73
Power sunroof........................................... 95
Power windows......................................... 90
Privacy locking........................................... 45
Puncture, see Tyres................................. 254
Putting calls on hold................................ 197
R
Radar sensor........................................... 161
limitations........................................... 164
Rain sensor................................................ 87
Rear bulbs
location............................................... 236
Rear control panel
audio system...................................... 138
Rearview and door mirrors
compass............................................... 94
door...................................................... 92
electrically retractable........................... 92
heating.................................................. 93
interior................................................... 93
Rear window, defrosting............................ 93
Recirculation............................................ 131
Recommendations during driving............ 202
Recommended child seats, table.............. 30
Recovery.................................................. 222
Refrigerant............................................... 126
Refuelling................................................. 204
fuel cap............................................... 204
fuel filler flap, electrical opening......... 204
fuel filler flap, manual opening............ 204
refuelling............................................. 204
Relay/fuse box: see Fuses....................... 244
Remote control
programmable.................................... 115
Remote control, see Remote control key. . 40
Remote control key................................... 40
battery replacement.............................. 46
detachable key blade........................... 40
functions............................................... 41
range..................................................... 42
Remote control key system, type appro-
val............................................................ 289
Resetting the door mirrors......................... 92
Resetting the power windows................... 91
Retractable power door mirrors................. 92
Reverse gear inhibitor.............................. 103
five-speed........................................... 102
Rims
cleaning.............................................. 266
Rustproofing............................................ 266
S
Safety grille.............................................. 212
Safety mode.............................................. 28
Safety net................................................. 211
Seat, see Seats.......................................... 73
Seatbelt
rear seat................................................ 15
seatbelt tensioner................................. 16
Seatbelt reminder...................................... 15
Seatbelts.................................................... 14
Seats.......................................................... 73
head restraints, rear.............................. 75
heating................................................ 129
lowering the front backrest................... 73
lowering the rear backrest.................... 75
power seats.......................................... 73
ventilated front seats.......................... 129
Securing loads (Loading)......................... 208
Service programme................................. 226
08
298
Set time interval....................................... 167
Side airbags............................................... 22
Signal input, external............................... 137
SIM card.................................................. 199
SIPS bag decal....................................... 23
SIPS bags.................................................. 22
Soot filter................................................. 207
Soot filter full............................................ 207
Spare wheel............................................. 254
temporary spare................................. 254
Spin control............................................. 157
Spin control function............................... 157
SRS Airbag.......................................... 18, 19
SRS system............................................... 17
switch................................................... 20
Stability and traction control system....... 157
Stability system....................................... 157
Stains....................................................... 267
Start assistance....................................... 101
Steering force, speed related.................. 159
Steering force level, see Steering force... 159
Steering lock.............................................. 98
Steering wheel........................................... 77
keypad.................. 77, 120, 137, 160, 196
keypad, adaptive cruise control......... 162
steering wheel adjustment.................... 77
Stone chips and scratches...................... 268
Storage spaces in the passenger compart-
ment......................................................... 188
Sunroof
opening and closing............................. 95
pinch protection.................................... 96
sunscreen............................................. 96
ventilation position................................ 95
Sunscreen, sunroof.................................... 96
Surround.................................................. 137
Symbols................................................... 157
indicator symbols................................. 66
information symbols............................. 66
warning symbols................................... 66
Symbols and messages
Collision Warning with Auto Brake..... 173
Distance Alert..................................... 168
Symbols and messages in the Adaptive
cruise control........................................... 165
T
Tailgate...................................................... 52
locking/unlocking............................ 41, 51
open...................................................... 52
Temperature
actual temperature............................. 126
Temperature control................................ 130
Testing the alarm system........................... 58
Timer........................................................ 131
Tools........................................................ 254
Total airing function........................... 50, 126
Towball
installation........................................... 218
removal............................................... 220
Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 217
Towing..................................................... 221
towing eye.......................................... 221
Towing capacity....................................... 275
Towing equipment................................... 217
specifications...................................... 218
Towing eye.............................................. 221
Trailer....................................................... 216
cable................................................... 216
driving with a trailer............................ 216
08
299
Transmission............................................ 102
Transponder.............................................. 90
Trip computer.......................................... 155
Trip meter.................................................. 69
Type approval, remote control key sys-
tem........................................................... 289
Type designation..................................... 272
Tyres
direction of rotation............................ 252
driving characteristics......................... 252
maintenance....................................... 252
pressure.............................................. 261
puncture repair................................... 256
specifications...................................... 260
speed ratings...................................... 260
tread wear indicators.......................... 253
winter tyres......................................... 253
U
Unlocking
from the inside...................................... 50
from the outside................................... 50
USB, connection...................................... 140
V
Vanity mirror...................................... 82, 190
Ventilation................................................ 127
Vibration damper..................................... 217
W
Warning lamp
adaptive cruise control....................... 161
collision warning system.................... 170
stability and traction control system. . 157
Warning lamps
airbags SRS.......................................... 67
alternator not charging......................... 67
fault in brake system............................ 67
low oil pressure..................................... 67
parking brake applied........................... 67
seatbelt reminder.................................. 67
warning................................................. 67
Warning sound
collision warning system.................... 170
Warning symbol, AIRBAG system............. 17
Warning triangle....................................... 215
Washer fluid, filling................................... 240
Washer nozzles, heated............................. 88
Washers
rear window.......................................... 88
washer fluid, filling.............................. 240
windscreen........................................... 88
Water and dirt-repellent coating................ 90
Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 266
Waxing..................................................... 266
Weights
kerb weight......................................... 275
Wheels
changing............................................. 255
installation........................................... 256
rims..................................................... 253
snow chains........................................ 254
spare wheel........................................ 254
Wheels and tyres..................................... 252
Whiplash injury, WHIPS............................. 25
WHIPS
child seat/booster cushion................... 25
whiplash injury...................................... 25
Windows, rearview and door mirrors......... 90
Windscreen................................................ 90
Windscreen washing.................................. 88
08
300
Windscreen wipers.................................... 87
rain sensor............................................ 87
Winter driving........................................... 203
Winter tyres.............................................. 253
Wiper blades............................................ 239
changing............................................. 239
cleaning.............................................. 240
replacing, rear window....................... 240
service position................................... 239
Wipers and washing.................................. 87
Notes
301
Notes
302
Notes
303
Notes
304
Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dc TP !C97C (Eng||sh), AT C92C, Pr|neo |n Sweoen, Coeborg 2CC9, Cop,r|gh 2CCC2CC9 vo|o Cur Corporu|on
VOLVO V70 & XC70
Owners Manual

XC70

Uploaded by

XC70

Uploaded by

Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dc TP !

Press the information button .

is a programmable remote control

panel consists of three pro-

is fully programmed it can be

is used to operate a garage

and must not be carried out when

. Monitor the indi-

depends on the programming

, while the "programming but-

and do not release until step 3

starts to flash, after approx. 20 seconds,

. Monitor the indi-

, while the "programming but-

is now set in so-called

Go to FM settings Advanced radio

Go to FM settings Advanced radio

Change CD track with or

Reset the values under Call register

You might also like